JP2021146063A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To prevent a decrease in a performance effect.SOLUTION: In a Pachinko machine 1, two processing systems (audio buses 6, 7) are assigned to one woofer. On the basis of voice data assigned to each processing system, it is possible to control the output of the voice by the woofer. In particular, the output level (output intensity/output stage) of the voice based on the voice data assigned to a first processing system changes according to the volume value set in a variable volume value setting area 6. On the other hand, the output level (output intensity/output stage) of the voice based on the data assigned to a second processing system does not change according to the volume value set in the variable volume value setting area 6.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 57

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine including a control means for controlling the output of the effect by the effect means.

Conventionally, a gaming machine including a control means for controlling the output of the effect by the effect means is known (see Patent Document 1).
This gaming machine is provided with an image control board (control means) that controls the output of the effect sound by the speaker (effect means). In particular, it is possible to change the initial value of the volume level of the effect sound output from the speaker by operating the setting switch.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-139471

However, with a conventional gaming machine, there is a risk that the effect of the effect will be reduced.
That is, in a conventional gaming machine, if the volume level of the effect sound is lowered by the player, the effect intended by the developer cannot be produced, and the effect may be reduced.
An object of the present invention is to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the first invention is produced by the effect means based on the data assigned to the first processing system and the data assigned to the second processing system. A control means capable of controlling the output is provided, and the output level of the effect based on the data assigned to the first processing system changes according to the set value and is assigned to the second processing system. The output level of the effect based on the data does not change according to the set value.
In the gaming machine according to the first invention, two processing systems (a first processing system and a second processing system) are assigned to one effect means. Then, it is possible to control the output of the effect by the effect means based on the data assigned to each processing system. In particular, the output level (output intensity / output stage) of the effect based on the data assigned to the first processing system changes according to the set value. On the other hand, the output level (output intensity / output stage) of the effect based on the data assigned to the second processing system does not change according to the set value.
As a result, among the effects produced by the effect means, for the effects that allow the output level to change according to the set value, the data for controlling the effect is assigned to the first processing system, so that the effect can be adjusted according to the set value. It is possible to change the output level.
On the other hand, among the effects by the effect means, for the effect that prohibits the change of the output level according to the set value, the data for controlling the effect is assigned to the second processing system, and the effect is output according to the set value. It is possible to keep the level unchanged.
As described above, by defining the processing system for allocating the data for controlling the production so as to produce the effect intended by the developer for each production by the production means, the output level according to the set value can be obtained. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect while making the change effective.
Here, the audio bus 6 described later corresponds to the first processing system. The data corresponds to audio data described later. The audio bus 7, which will be described later, corresponds to the second processing system. The woofer described later corresponds to the directing means. The effect control board 300, which will be described later, corresponds to the control means. As the production, the sound (sound production) described later corresponds. The output level corresponds to the volume described later. The set value corresponds to the volume value set in the variable volume value setting area 6 described later.

The gaming machine according to the second invention is characterized in that, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, the output level of the effect based on the data assigned to the second processing system is fixed to a predetermined level. do.
In the gaming machine according to the second invention, it is possible to more reliably prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect.

It is a perspective view which shows the whole structure of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed the front of the game board, and schematically showed the part necessary for explanation. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the launch condition detection circuit and the launch control circuit. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an effect control board. This is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210. It is a flowchart which shows the CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main loop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the evacuation processing at the time of power-off. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the dynamic port output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance display device output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting-related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the switch management process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure start ball detection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the special game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during stop of a special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening the big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric service opening / closing switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening closure effective processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening end wait processing. It is a flowchart which shows a normal game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during stop of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric service opening / closing switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory opening control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory closing effective processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory opening end weight processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance display device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub CPU initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the initial transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows the subtimer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows Vsync interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command construction task processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sound interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows lamp interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the movable body interrupt processing. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a sound circuit. It is a figure which shows the type of a frequency correction parameter. It is a figure which shows the setting of a channel router. It is a figure explaining the ducking function. It is a figure which shows the content of the command list corresponding to a sound effect A, B. It is a figure which shows an example of the volume value set in a channel router setting register. It is a figure which shows the contents of the volume value setting table.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the present embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of the pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, an integrated door unit 4, and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2, the inner frame unit 3, and the integrated door unit 4 are fixed to each other via a hinge mechanism. As a result, the inner frame unit 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Further, the integrated door unit 4 can be opened and closed with respect to each of the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2.

The outer frame unit 2 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (outer frame). Then, the outer frame included in the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement park.
The inner frame unit 3 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is arranged inside the outer frame unit 2.
The integrated door unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape. The integrated door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a arranged at a substantially central portion, a decorative portion 4b arranged around the transparent plate 4a, a saucer unit 5 arranged under the transparent plate 4a, and the like. It has a firing handle unit 6 arranged on the side of the saucer unit 5.
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape by a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is formed of a transparent or translucent resin material and has a shape that bulges forward. Each corner on the upper side of the decorative portion 4b is provided with a sound extraction portion 4c in which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. Each sound extraction unit 4c is provided with a plurality of sound extraction holes through which the sound output by the speaker 22 passes. Further, a frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the decorative portion 4b. The frame lamp 20 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The saucer unit 5 includes a saucer 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls) and various operating means that can be operated by the player.
In the present embodiment, various operation means include an effect button 5b, a rotary selector 5c, a light amount adjustment button (not shown), a volume adjustment button (not shown), a cross key button (not shown), and the like. ing.
The effect button 5b includes an operation unit that can be pressed by the player and a button switch 25 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing operation of the operation unit. The button switch 25 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 (see FIG. 3) each time the operation unit is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called “jog dial”) includes an operation unit that can be rotated by a player and a dial switch 26 (see FIG. 3) that detects the rotation operation of the operation unit. The dial switch 26 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the operation unit is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 [°]).

The light amount adjustment button consists of two operation units (first operation unit and second operation unit) that can be pressed by the player, and a light amount adjustment switch 27 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing operation of each operation unit. And are configured to include. The light amount adjusting switch 27 outputs the first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the first operation unit is pressed, and the second operation unit is pressed each time the second operation unit is pressed. Is output to the effect control board 300.
The volume adjustment buttons are two operation units (first operation unit and second operation unit) that can be pressed by the player, and a volume adjustment switch 28 that detects the pressing operation of each operation unit (see FIG. 3). And are configured to include. The volume adjustment switch 28 outputs the first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the first operation unit is pressed, and the second operation unit is pressed each time the second operation unit is pressed. Is output to the effect control board 300.
The cross key buttons are four operation units (up key button, down key button, left key button, and right key button) that can be pressed by the player, and a cross key switch that detects the press operation of each operation unit. 29 (see FIG. 3) and 29 (see FIG. 3). The cross key switch 29 outputs a first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the upper key button is pressed, and outputs a second detection signal each time the lower key button is pressed. Output to the effect control board 300, each time the left key button is pressed, a third detection signal is output to the effect control board 300, and each time the right key button is pressed, the fourth Is output to the effect control board 300.

Further, a lending operation unit 7 is arranged on the upper surface of the saucer unit 5. The lending operation unit 7 has a ball lending button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to the CR unit 700 capable of reading and updating the information recorded on the prepaid card. Then, when the prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 700, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 700 is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated with the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 700, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the saucer 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the remaining frequency of the updated valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, if the return button 7b is operated with the prepaid card having the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the CR unit 700, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 700.
Here, as the prepaid cart, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, or the like is applicable.

The launch handle unit 6 includes a handle base portion (not shown), a handle operation portion (not shown), and a launch stop button (not shown).
The handle base portion is attached to the front side of the integrated door unit 4. A bearing portion is provided on the front side of the handle base portion.
The handle operation unit is configured so that it can be gripped by the player. A rotating shaft portion is provided on the back side of the handle operating portion. The handle operating portion is rotatably attached to the handle base portion by pivotally supporting the rotating shaft portion by the bearing portion of the handle base portion.
The handle operation unit can be rotated (displaced) from a predetermined initial position to a predetermined limit position. Inside the firing handle unit 6, an urging means (spring in the present embodiment) for urging the handle operating portion toward the initial position side is arranged. As a result, the handle operation unit is arranged (displaced) at the initial position when the rotation operation by the player is not performed.
The launch stop button is provided on the side surface side of the handle operation unit. The launch stop button can be pressed by the player.

Further, the firing handle unit 6 includes a firing volume 411, a touch sensor 412, and a firing stop switch 413.
The firing volume 411 is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 411 detects the amount of rotation operation of the handle operation unit (the angle at which the handle operation unit is rotated). Specifically, the firing volume 411 includes a rotation shaft and a resistor whose resistance value changes according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the rotation shaft. The rotation shaft of the firing volume 411 is coaxially fixed to the rotation shaft portion of the handle operating portion. As a result, the rotation shaft of the firing volume 411 is rotated according to the rotation operation of the handle operating portion, and the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the rotation operation amount of the handle operating portion.
The firing volume 411 is electrically connected to the operation detection unit 421 (see FIG. 4). The operation detection unit 421 detects the rotation operation (rotation operation amount) of the handle operation unit based on the change in the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411.
The touch sensor 412 detects contact (grasping) by the player with the steering wheel operating portion based on the change in capacitance. Then, the touch sensor 412 outputs a touch signal to the firing possible condition detection unit 422 (see FIG. 4) when the player's contact with the steering wheel operation unit is detected (the touch signal is set to a high level). do). On the other hand, the touch sensor 412 stops the output of the touch signal to the launchable condition detection unit 422 (the touch signal is set to the low level) when the player's contact with the steering wheel operation unit is not detected.
The launch stop switch 413 detects the pressing operation of the launch stop button. Then, the launch stop switch 413 outputs a launch stop signal to the launch enable condition detection unit 422 (the launch stop signal is set to a high level) when the pressing operation of the launch stop button is not detected. On the other hand, the launch stop switch 413 stops the output of the launch stop signal to the launchable condition detection unit 422 when the push operation of the launch stop button is detected (the launch stop signal is set to a low level).

(Structure of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front surface of the game board and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inside of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3. As a result, the game board unit 10 is arranged on the back side of the integrated door unit 4. Then, the player can visually recognize the game board 11 (game area 30) described later through the transparent plate 4a. In the present embodiment, a game area 30 described later is configured between the back surface of the transparent plate 4a and the front surface of the game board 11.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set plate (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set plate, and various effect devices (main image display device 31, sub) attached to the set plate. An image display device 32, a movable body unit, etc.).

The set plate is formed in a box shape with the front side open. An opening formed of a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.
The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set board. The game board 11 is formed of a resin in a flat plate shape. An opening (not shown) formed of a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the game board 11. Then, the player can visually recognize the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set plate.
Around the opening in the front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is formed in which the game ball launched in response to the rotation operation of the launch handle unit 6 flows down. Then, in the game area 30, as a path through which the game ball flows down, a left path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 are configured. There is.
Further, a board surface lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the game area 30 of the game board 11. The board lamp 21 includes a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 is composed of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display.
The main image display device 31 includes a display screen 31a capable of displaying various effects images (moving images / still images).
On the display screen 31a, three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) on which the first effect symbol z1 (not shown) and a second effect symbol z2 (not shown) are displayed. It is possible to configure one second effect symbol display area a4 (not shown).
The first effect symbol z1 is configured to include identification information (design) such as numbers, characters, symbols, and characters. In each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the first effect symbol z1. The second effect symbol z2 is composed of a color bar. In the second effect symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the second effect symbol z2.

The variable display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that the first effect symbol z1 is moved (scrolled) in each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and is displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. 2 A display in which the type of the effect symbol z2 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is sequentially changed).
The stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that one type of first effect symbol z1 is stopped at the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second effect symbol display area a4. In, a display in which one type of second effect symbol z2 is displayed (a color bar represents a predetermined color).
Then, a special symbol is created by combining the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and the second effect symbol z2 that is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. The result of the lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is displayed.
Further, on the display screen 31a, it is possible to configure the reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2 (not shown) on which the reserved symbol h (not shown) is displayed.
In the reserved symbol display area b1, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information in the notification display (variation display and stop display of the special symbol) is displayed. In the reserved symbol display area b2, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information for which the notification display is suspended is displayed.

The sub image display device 32 is arranged at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31.
The sub-image display device 32 is composed of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display and a CRT display. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying an effect image.
The sub-image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) along the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including the origin position (see FIG. 2) and the effect position below the origin position (not shown). ..
The sub-image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the origin position is arranged above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the effect position is arranged on the front side of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and covers a part of the display screen 31a.

A first starting port 51 is provided below the display screen 31a in the game area 30. The first starting port 51 is an entry port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and a game ball can enter the ball at all times. The first starting port 51 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
A special figure 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the first start port 51. The special figure 1 start port switch 101 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entering the first start port 51 (the entry of the game ball into the first start port 51). Output. The main control board 200 executes the first special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101.

On the left side of the first starting opening 51 in the game area 30, an upper left other winning opening 55, a left middle other winning opening 56, and a lower left other winning opening 57 are provided. Each of the other winning openings 55 to 57 is an entrance opening that opens upward, and a game ball can be entered at all times. Each of the other winning openings 55 to 57 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left route (it is not possible to enter a game ball flowing down the right route).
The game board 11 is provided with a left winning opening switch 106 (see FIG. 3). The left winning opening switch 106 is a game ball that has entered the upper left other winning opening 55 (a game ball has entered the upper left other winning opening 55) and a game ball that has entered the left middle other winning opening 56 (a left middle other winning opening). The detection signal is sent to the main control board in response to the detection of the game ball entering the mouth 56) and the game ball entering the lower left other winning opening 57 (the entry of the game ball into the lower left other winning opening 57). Output for 200. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the left prize opening switch 106.

A start gate 41 is provided on the right side of the display screen 31a in the game area 30. The starting gate 41 is formed so that it can be passed by a game ball at all times. The starting gate 41 is capable of passing a game ball flowing down the right path (cannot pass a game ball flowing down the left path).
A gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3) is provided at the starting gate 41. The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passage of the start gate 41 by the game ball). The main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104.

A large winning opening 53 is provided below the starting gate 41 in the game area 30. The large winning opening 53 is displaced into a closed state that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 53 and an open state that allows the game ball to enter the large winning opening 53. A special electric accessory (special electric accessory) 53a (so-called "attacker") is provided.
The special electric accessory 53a is opened and closed by the special electric accessory solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). In the large winning opening 53, the special electric accessory 53a is normally closed and it is impossible to enter a game ball, but the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won. When a big hit game state occurs, the special electric accessory 53a is opened and the game ball can be inserted. The large winning opening 53 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right route (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left route).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the large winning opening 53. The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 53 (the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 53). The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103.

A second starting opening 52 is provided below the large winning opening 53 in the game area 30. The second starting port 52 has a closed state that prevents the game ball from entering the second starting port 52 and an open state that allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 52. An ordinary electric accessory (ordinary electric accessory) 52a (so-called "electric tulip") that can be displaced is provided.
The ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened and closed by the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). At the second starting port 52, the normal electric accessory 52a is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 52. However, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is not allowed to enter. The 52a is set to the open state, and a game ball can be entered. The second starting port 52 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
A special figure 2 start port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the second start port 52. The special figure 2 start port switch 102 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entering the second start port 52 (the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52). Output. The main control board 200 executes the second special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102.

Below the second starting opening 52 in the game area 30, a right other winning opening 54 is provided. The right other winning opening 54 is an entry opening that opens upward, and a game ball can be entered at all times. The right other winning opening 54 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right route (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left route).
A right winning opening switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the right other winning opening 54. The right winning opening switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the right other winning opening 54 (the entry of the game ball into the right other winning opening 54). .. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the right winning opening switch 105.

At the lowermost position in the game area 30, an out port 58 for ejecting a game ball that has not entered (winned) in any of the winning openings 51 to 57 is provided.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which the game ball discharged from the game area 30 passes. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, all the game balls launched into the game area 30 (all the game balls discharged from the game area 30) are configured to pass through the discharge path. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 30 is discharged from the game area 30 and flows into the discharge path by entering any of the winning openings 51 to 57 or passing through the out opening 58. do.
Specifically, the game balls that have entered each of the winning openings 51 to 57 are guided to the discharge path after being detected by the switches 101-103, 105, 106 arranged in the winning openings. Further, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 is guided to the discharge path.
The inner frame unit 3 is provided with an out switch 109 (see FIG. 3). Then, the out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball passing through the discharge path (the game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all the game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Further, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game ball to each of the winning openings 51 to 57 and the starting gate 41.

A main display device 60 is arranged on the game board 11. The main display device 60 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light emitting element (LED in this embodiment).
Information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60.
The main display device 60 includes a special figure 1 display device, a special figure 2 display device, a normal figure display device, a special figure 1 hold display device, a special figure 2 hold display device, a normal figure hold display device, and a round. It is configured to include a display device, a right-handed display device, a probability variation display device, and a time saving display device.
Specifically, the main display device 60 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
Then, in the main display device 60, LEDs 1 to LED8 constitute a special figure 1 display device, LEDs 7 to LED16 constitute a special figure 2 display device, and LEDs 17 and 18 constitute a normal figure display device, and LED19. ~ LED23 constitutes a round display device, LED24 constitutes a right-handed display device, LEDs 25 and 26 constitute a special figure 1 hold display device, and LEDs 27 and 28 constitute a special figure 2 hold display device. Then, the LEDs 29 and 30 constitute a normal drawing hold display device, the LED 31 constitutes a probability variation display device, and the LED 32 constitutes a time saving display device.

The special figure 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 1 display device, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
The special figure 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special symbol composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 2 display device, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the special symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the special symbol display device and the display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4 are the times when the variable display is started. , The time when the stop display is started, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped display symbol are associated with each other.
Then, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (big hit symbol), or when the second special symbol (stop displayed) displayed on the special figure 2 display device is stopped. When the stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (big hit symbol), a jackpot gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is generated.

The normal symbol display device can perform variable display and stop display of a normal symbol composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the ordinary symbol display device, the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is displayed by the ordinary symbol that is stopped and displayed. Then, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device becomes a specific symbol (per symbol per symbol), a game state per normal symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.

The special figure 1 hold display device displays the number of times (special figure 1 hold number) that the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is held.
The special figure 2 hold display device displays the number of times (special figure 2 hold number) that the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is held.
The number of times the display of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery is held (the number of times the normal figure is held) is displayed on the normal figure hold display device.
The round display device displays the number of round games (type of jackpot game state) executed during the jackpot game state.
The right-handed display device displays the route (left side route or right side route) at which the game ball should be launched.
The probability change display device displays the gaming state (during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state or during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state) when the power is restored.
The time saving display device displays the current gaming status (time saving control is being executed or stopped).

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with one or a plurality of movable body units (not shown). In the present embodiment, one or more movable body units are arranged in the integrated door unit 4, and one or more movable body units are arranged in the game board unit 10.
Each movable body unit of the integrated door unit 4 is arranged on the front surface of the decorative portion 4b, the upper surface of the saucer unit 5, and the like, and it is possible to perform a predetermined effect operation.
Each movable body unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set plate. Specifically, each movable body unit is arranged in a space (hereinafter, referred to as "effect space") between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a). Then, each movable body unit can perform a predetermined effect operation in the effect space.
Each movable body unit includes an effect member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 24 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 3) is used as a drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. A solenoid may be used as the drive source.
The effect member can be displaced along a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the effect member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and an effect position. The effect member is driven (displaced) by the motor 23.

The position detection sensor 24 is composed of a photo sensor or the like. The position detection sensor 24 detects the position of the effect member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 24 includes a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit that receives the light projected from the light projecting unit. Then, the position detection sensor 24 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 in response to the light reception (detection) of the light projected from the light emitting unit by the light receiving unit. On the other hand, when the position detection sensor 24 does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light emitting unit by the light receiving unit, the position detection sensor 24 stops the output of the detection signal to the effect control board 300.
Further, a shielding plate is provided at a predetermined position of the effect member. Then, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the shielding plate is arranged between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor 24, and the incoming light to the light receiving portion is blocked. As a result, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the output of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24 to the effect control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the effect member is not arranged at the initial position, the position detection sensor 24 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300.
As a result, the effect control board 300 can detect whether or not the effect member is arranged at the initial position depending on the input status of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal states.
In the present embodiment, as the detection sensor, a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are arranged.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects the opening of the integrated door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3. Then, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the opening of the integrated door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3.
The inner frame opening sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2.

The vibration detection sensor 113 detects the vibration of the game board 11. In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is arranged on the game board 11. Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the vibration of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11. In the present embodiment, the game board 11 is provided with two radio wave detection sensors 114. Then, each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the radio wave.
The magnetic detection sensor 115 detects the magnetism generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is arranged in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Further, in the game board 11, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the detection of magnetism. Further, each magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210.
The pachinko machine 1 includes various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 supplies power (electric power) to the main control board 200, the effect control board 300, the payout control board 400, each control board 200, 300, 400, and the like. It includes a plurality of control boards such as a power supply board 600, a driver board 330, and a sub-connection board 340.
The plurality of control boards 200, 300, 400, 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards. Further, each control board 200, 300, 400, 600 is housed in a separate board case.
The main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The payout control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the payout control board 400 is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3.

(Structure of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 includes a one-chip microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer), a clock generation circuit 202, a random number generation circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, and a sink. It is configured to include a driver 240, source drivers 250a, 250b, and the like.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI in which a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, and the like.

The main control board 200 includes a memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory area used by the CPU 210 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230. ..
Here, in FIG. 6, the address for specifying the memory area is shown in hexadecimal (“H” indicates that it is in hexadecimal).

The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) includes a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and an unused area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 includes a program area, an unused area, and a data area. A program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the program area. Data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the data area. The used area m1 may be configured not to include an unused area.

The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
In the program area, there is a program (program code) for executing the processing related to the test specified by the game machine rules, and a program (program) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). Code) and are stored. In the data area, data (program data) for executing the process related to the test defined by the game machine rules and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 are stored.
Further, in addition to the used area m1 and the unused area m2, the ROM 220 is provided with an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, and the like.
Arbitrary data such as a program title and version is stored in the ROM comment area. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
Further, the ROM 220 is provided with an unused area m3 of a predetermined byte (for example, 16 bytes or more) between the used area m1 and the unused area m2. As a result, the boundary between the used area m1 and the non-used area m2 is clarified.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) includes a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and an unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The used area M1 is configured to include a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during the execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. The used area M1 may be configured not to include the unused area.
Specifically, the work area includes a set value area, a game machine state flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error-related area, a normal game-related area 1, and a normal game-related area 2. It is configured to include.
The set value is stored in the set value area. The gaming machine status flag is stored in the gaming machine status flag area. The checksum is stored in the checksum area. The backup flag is stored in the backup flag area. Information about the error is stored in the error-related area. A subcommand pointer or the like is stored in the normal game-related area 1. In the normal game-related area 2, input / output data in the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), lottery results, flags for managing the game state, and the like are stored. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 is an area for storing game information acquired by inputting detection signals from each of the special figure 1 start port switch 101, the special figure 2 start port switch 102, and the gate switch 104. (A game information storage area to be described later) is included in the configuration.

The unused area M2 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used during execution of a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test specified by a gaming machine rule, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is used as an area to temporarily store various data. On the other hand, in the stack area, a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test specified by a gaming machine rule or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206) is being executed. It is also used as an area to temporarily save various data.
Specifically, the work area is configured to include a performance display-related area. The performance display-related area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
Further, the RAM 230 is provided with an unused area M3 having a predetermined byte (16 bytes or more) between the used area M1 and the unused area M2. Thereby, the boundary between the used area M1 and the non-used area M2 is clarified.

In the present embodiment, it is permitted to refer to the data stored in the non-used area M2 in the process based on the program (the program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1.
On the other hand, it is prohibited that the data stored in the unused area M2 is rewritten (changed) by the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 (the program for controlling the progress of the game). There is.
Further, in the processing based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (the program for executing the processing related to the test specified by the game machine rules, or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the use area It is permitted to refer to the data stored in M1.
On the other hand, the used area is subjected to the processing based on the program stored in the non-used area m2 (the program for executing the process related to the test specified by the game machine rules or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is prohibited that the data stored in M1 is rewritten (changed).
The game in the pachinko machine 1 can be progressed (completed) by a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronous signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment), and outputs this clock to each of the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203.
The random number generation circuit 203 has a first loop counter that generates a winning random number in the normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter that generates a jackpot random number in the first special symbol lottery, and a second loop counter that generates a jackpot random number in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured to include a three-loop counter and a fourth loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A random number is generated by winning a normal symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. Generate a jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. Generate a jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter sets the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, 0 to 10066) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once every 32 divisions of the clock frequency). Reach group random numbers are generated by updating one by one in (within range). In the present embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input ports 0 to 3).
The input port 0 has a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114, and a magnetic detection sensor 115. The detection signal from is input.
A RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, a handle detection signal from the launchable condition detection unit 422, and the like are input to the input port 1.
The input port 2 has a detection signal from the count switch 103, a detection signal from the right winning port switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning port switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and a radio wave detection sensor 114 from the other. A detection signal or the like is input.
A detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101, a detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, and the like are input to the input port 3.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor (detection signal). In the reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of the detection signal from the switch sensor is set.
Specifically, when the detection signal from the switch sensor is input (high level), "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor, and the switch sensor is set. When the detection signal from is not input (low level), "0" is set.

The output port 205 includes a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, output ports 0 to output ports 4).
The output port 0 outputs data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60. Then, the data signal output from the output port 0 is input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, a launch permission signal for detecting the launch conditions described later, and the like. The common signal output from the output port 1 is input to the sink driver 240.
The output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450.
The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the drive of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the drive of the special electric accessory solenoid 65, and the like.
The output port 4 outputs a data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206. Then, the data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 250b.

Further, the main control board 200 includes a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (subcommand) from the command output port 1 to the effect control board 300, and also transmits a control command (payout command) from the command output port 2 to the payout control board 400. do.
The command output port 1 and the command output port 2 are a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown), respectively. have.
The transmission data register outputs a control command input based on the subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of a plurality of registers and can store a plurality of control commands. Then, the FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer and transmits it as serial data to the effect control board 300 or the payout control board 400.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light emitting element (LED in this embodiment). Since the performance display device 206 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11, it cannot be visually recognized by the player.
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the game machine state (hereinafter referred to as “game machine state”) includes a game-enabled state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormality state, and a RAM abnormality state. And the backup abnormal state are specified. Then, the information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes according to the state of the gaming machine being generated.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display unit is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot segment LED capable of displaying dots such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED33 to LED64). In the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to LED 40 serve as the first digit display unit, LEDs 41 to LED 48 serve as the second digit display unit, and LEDs 49 to LED 56 serve as the third digit display unit, and LEDs 57 to LED 64. Is the display unit of the 4th digit.

During the game-enabled state, the game can proceed. Then, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 during the occurrence of the playable state.
In the present embodiment, the first base ratio and the second base ratio are set every predetermined time (5.0 [s] in the present embodiment) in the performance display device 206 during the occurrence of the playable state. , Are displayed alternately.
The "first base ratio" is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the present time).
The "second base ratio" is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio) is provided by the upper two-digit display unit among the four-digit display units. It is displayed, and a number indicating the base ratio (percentage) is displayed by the display unit of the lower two digits.

The set value can be changed while the setting change state is occurring. Then, during the occurrence of the setting change state, the setting value stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the information indicating that the setting change state is occurring by the upper 3 digit display unit among the 4 digit display units (specifically, the upper 1st digit is ""R","n." In the upper 2nd digit, "-" in the upper 3rd digit) is displayed, and a number indicating the set value stored in the set value area is displayed by the display unit of the lowest 1 digit. Will be done.
The set value can be confirmed while the setting confirmation state is occurring. Then, during the occurrence of the setting confirmation state, the set value stored (set) in the set value area of the RAM 230 is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the information indicating that the setting confirmation state is being generated by the upper three-digit display unit of the four-digit display unit (specifically, the upper first digit is ""r","n." In the upper 2nd digit, no display in the upper 3rd digit) is displayed, and a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed by the display unit of the lowest 1 digit. NS.

During the game stop state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state), the game cannot proceed. Then, during the occurrence of the game stop state, the performance display device 206 displays an error code corresponding to the occurrence of the abnormality.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, among the four-digit display units, the information indicating that the game stopped state is occurring by the upper three-digit display unit (specifically, the upper first digit is ""E","r." in the upper 2nd digit, no display in the upper 3rd digit) is displayed, and the error that occurred (setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error) is displayed by the display unit of the last 1 digit. A number indicating the error code corresponding to the status) is displayed.

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. That is, the RAM clear switch 207 is configured to include an operation unit that can be pressed. Then, the RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is pressed.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. That is, the setting key switch 208 is configured to include an operation unit provided with a key hole. By inserting a dedicated key into the key hole, the operation unit is unlocked and can be rotated (switched) from the OFF state to the ON state. Then, the setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is in the ON state.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of the common signal to the display devices 60 and 206 according to the common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) output from the output port 1.
The source driver 250a controls the output of the data signal to the main display device 60 according to the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 0.
The source driver 250b controls the output of the data signal to the performance display device 206 according to the data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4.
The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a source driver 250a corresponding to the main display device 60 and a source driver 250b corresponding to the performance display device 206. The application of the power supply voltage Vcc to the data signal line is individually controlled by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, a common sink driver 240 is provided for the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. The grounding of the common signal line is collectively controlled by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
As a result, it is not necessary to provide a sink driver 240 corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and as a result, an output port (common signal is output) corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. It is not necessary to provide an output port).
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of parts required for lighting control of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206 on the main control board 200 (CPU210). It is not necessary to generate a common signal corresponding to each of the above, and it is possible to reduce the control load for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.

Further, the main control board 200 includes a test signal output circuit (not shown).
In the test signal output process (step S4-24) described later, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating an internal state (big hit game state, time saving control execution state, special symbol lottery probability state, etc.). Then, the generated test signal is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from a predetermined output port. Then, the test signal output from the predetermined output port is input to the interface board of the test computer (not shown) via the test signal output circuit.
Further, in the main control board 200, the detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101, the detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102, the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the detection signal from the count switch 103, and the right prize. The detection signal from the mouth switch 105, the detection signal from the left winning port switch 106, the detection signal from the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204, and the test signal output circuit of the test computer is used. Input to the interface board.
Further, in the main control board 200, control signals for controlling the drive of each solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, special electric accessory solenoid 65, etc.) output from the output port 3 are transmitted to the solenoids 64 and 65. At the same time, it is input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.

(Structure of payout control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the payout control board 400 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configurations of the launch condition detection circuit and the launch control circuit.
The payout control board 400 controls the launch of the game ball to the game area 30 and the payout of the game ball.
The payout control board 400 includes a one-chip microprocessor.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI in which a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (prize ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200. Further, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (ball lending operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit 700.
Further, the payout control board 400 includes a resistance value (voltage value) input from the firing volume 411, a touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, a firing stop signal input from the firing stop switch 413, and a main control board. Based on the launch permission signal input from the 200 and the CR connection signal input from the CR unit 700, the game ball launch operation by the game ball launcher 430 (launch solenoid 431) is controlled.
Hereinafter, a method of controlling the game ball launching operation by the payout control board 400 will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 400 includes a launch condition detection circuit 420 and a launch control circuit 425 as a circuit for controlling the game ball payout operation.
The launch condition detection circuit 420 is a circuit that detects the establishment of the launch condition, which will be described later.
The launch condition detection circuit 420 includes an operation detection unit 421, a launchable condition detection unit 422, and a launch condition detection unit 423.
The operation detection unit 421 is a circuit that detects the rotation operation (rotation operation amount) of the handle operation unit.
The operation detection unit 421 includes an operational amplifier that controls the output of the operation detection signal according to the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411 (the operation detection signal is set to a high level or a low level).
Specifically, in the firing handle unit 6, the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the amount of rotation of the handle operating unit. Then, the operation detection unit 421 detects the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411, and based on the detected resistance value (voltage value), the presence / absence of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit and the rotation operation of the handle operation unit. Detect the amount and.
Then, the operation detection unit 421 generates an operation detection signal when detecting the rotation operation of the steering wheel operation unit, and outputs the generated operation detection signal to the launchable condition detection unit 422 (operation detection). Make the signal high level). On the other hand, the operation detection unit 421 stops the output of the operation detection signal to the launchable condition detection unit 422 when the rotation operation of the handle operation unit is not detected (the operation detection signal is set to the low level).
Further, when the operation detection unit 421 detects the rotation operation of the handle operation unit, the operation detection unit 421 generates a firing intensity signal according to the rotation operation amount of the handle operation unit (resistance value of the firing volume 411), and the generated firing The intensity signal is output to the launch control circuit 425.

The launchable condition detection unit 422 is a circuit for detecting the establishment of the launchable condition.
The launchable condition detection unit 422 has an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls output / stop of a predetermined signal according to the operation result of the logical product of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal, and an AND gate. It includes a transistor that switches the output / stop of the handle detection signal according to a predetermined signal output from the IC.
The "launchable condition" is a condition related to the player's operation (player's intention) among a plurality of conditions constituting the launch condition described later.
The firing conditions include (1) conditions based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection status of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit), and (2) the detection status of the touch sensor 412 (handle by the player). A condition based on the detection status of contact with the operation unit) and a condition based on (3) the detection status of the launch stop switch 413 (detection status of the operation of pressing the launch stop button) are included.
In the present embodiment, (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 detect the rotation operation of the steering wheel operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 detects the contact of the player with the steering wheel operation unit. The firing enablement condition is satisfied when all the conditions of (3) that the pressing operation of the firing stop button is not detected by the firing stop switch 413 are satisfied. On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the launchable condition is not satisfied.
Here, the firing conditions include (1) a condition based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (the detection status of the rotation operation of the steering wheel operation unit), and (2) the detection status of the touch sensor 412 (player). As a configuration that includes a condition based on (detection status of contact with the steering wheel operation unit) and (3) a condition based on the detection status of the launch stop switch 413 (detection status of pressing operation of the launch stop button). It doesn't matter.
That is, (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 detect the rotation operation of the steering wheel operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 detects the contact of the player with the steering wheel operation unit. When both of the conditions are satisfied, the launchable condition is satisfied, and when at least one of the conditions (1) and (2) is not satisfied, the launchable condition is not satisfied. It doesn't matter.

Specifically, the launchable condition detection unit 422 includes an operation detection signal input from the operation detection unit 421, a touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, and a launch stop signal input from the launch stop switch 413. Based on this, it is detected whether or not the launchable condition is satisfied.
At this time, the launchable condition detection unit 422 detects the establishment of the launchable condition when all of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal are input. On the other hand, when at least one of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal is not input, the establishment of the launchable condition is not detected.
The launchable condition detection unit 422 generates a handle detection signal when detecting the establishment of the launchable condition, and transmits the generated handle detection signal to each of the main control board 200 and the launch condition detection unit 423. Output (set the handle detection signal to high level). On the other hand, when the launchable condition detection unit 422 has not detected the establishment of the launchable condition, the launchable condition detection unit 422 stops the output of the handle detection signal to each of the main control board 200 and the launch condition detection unit 423 (the handle detection signal is lowered). Level).

The launch condition detection unit 423 is a circuit that detects the establishment of the launch condition.
The launch condition detection unit 423 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls output / stop of the launch signal according to the calculation result of the logical product of the handle detection signal, the launch permission signal, and the CR connection signal. NS.
The "launch condition" is a condition for executing the launch of the game ball (game ball launch operation) to the game area 30 by the game ball launcher 430 (launch solenoid 431).
In the present embodiment, (1) the launchable condition is satisfied, (2) the launch permission signal is input from the main control board 200, and (3) the CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700. The firing condition is satisfied when all the conditions of being done are satisfied. On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the firing condition is not satisfied.
The "launch permission signal" indicates that communication is possible between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 (the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected). As a premise, when the playable state is set, the output is output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection unit 423.
Here, the launch permission signal may be output from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection unit 423 while the power is being turned on to the main control board 200, regardless of the gaming machine state. No. That is, when communication is possible between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 (when the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected), a launch permission signal However, it may be configured to be output from the main control board 200 to the firing condition detection unit 423.
The "CR connection signal" is used when communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 (when the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected). It is output from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection unit 423.

Specifically, the launch condition detection unit 423 includes a handle detection signal input from the launchable condition detection unit 422, a launch permission signal input from the main control board 200, and a CR connection signal input from the CR unit 700. , Detects whether or not the firing condition is satisfied.
At this time, the launch condition detection unit 423 detects the establishment of the launch condition when all of the handle detection signal, the launch permission signal, and the CR connection signal are input. On the other hand, when at least one of the handle detection signal, the launch permission signal, and the CR connection signal is not input, the establishment of the launch condition is not detected.
The launch condition detection unit 423 generates a launch signal when detecting the establishment of the launch condition, and outputs the generated launch signal to the launch control circuit 425 (the launch signal is set to a high level). On the other hand, the launch condition detection unit 423 stops the output of the launch signal to the launch control circuit 425 (sets the launch signal to a low level) when the establishment of the launch condition is not detected.

The launch control circuit 425 is a circuit that controls the launch intensity of the game ball by the game ball launcher 430 and the launch timing of the game ball by the game ball launcher 430. That is, the launch control circuit 425 controls the output of the drive signal to the game ball launcher 430 (launch solenoid 431).
Specifically, the firing control circuit 425 includes a clock generating unit (not shown), a firing timing control unit (not shown), and a firing solenoid driving unit (not shown).
The clock generation unit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency to the emission timing control unit.
The firing timing control unit generates a pulse signal for controlling the firing timing based on the clock signal input from the clock generating unit, and outputs the generated pulse signal to the firing solenoid driving unit. At this time, the firing timing control unit generates a pulse signal so that the number of game balls fired per minute is a predetermined number (for example, 100 [balls]).
The firing solenoid drive unit is based on a firing signal input from the firing condition detection unit 423, a pulse signal input from the firing timing control unit, and a firing intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421. Controls the output of the drive signal to 431.
Specifically, the firing solenoid drive unit is input from the operation detection unit 421 when the firing signal is input from the firing condition detection unit 423 and the pulse signal is input from the firing timing control unit. A drive signal (drive current) corresponding to the launch intensity signal is output to the launch solenoid 431. As a result, the game ball is launched with an intensity corresponding to the launch intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421.
On the other hand, the launch solenoid drive unit stops the output of the drive signal to the launch solenoid 431 when the launch signal is not input from the launch condition detection unit 423. As a result, the launch of the game ball is stopped.

The game ball launching device 430 includes a hitting mallet (not shown) and a launching solenoid 431 for driving the hitting mallet. The firing solenoid 431 is composed of a rotary solenoid. Here, the hammer may be driven by another drive source such as a motor.
A game ball is supplied to the game ball launcher 430 from a ball feed unit (not shown). Then, when a drive signal is input to the launch solenoid 431, the launch solenoid 431 is driven according to the input drive signal, and the game ball is launched by the hitting mallet. As a result, the game ball is launched into the game area 30.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the launch is stopped on the premise that the playable state is set on the main control board 200 and the communication between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 is possible. When the handle operation unit is rotated (displaced from the initial position toward the limit position side) by the contact of the player without pressing the button, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launching device 430 is started. .. Then, during the execution of the game ball launching operation by the game ball launching device 430, the game ball is launched into the game area 30 with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the handle operation unit.
Further, when the launch stop button is pressed, the game ball launch operation by the game ball launch device 430 is stopped. That is, even when the handle operation unit is rotated by the contact of the player, when the launch stop button is pressed, the game ball launch operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped.
Further, when the handle operating unit is returned to the initial position (when the handle operating unit is not rotated), the game ball launching operation by the game ball launching device 430 is stopped. That is, even when the player is in contact with the handle operation unit, when the handle operation unit is returned to the initial position, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the output of the handle detection signal from the launchable condition detection unit 422 to the main control board 200 is maintained while the launchable condition is satisfied (hereinafter referred to as the “launchable state”). Will be done.
That is, a state is occurring in which the rotation operation of the handle operation unit is detected, the contact with the handle operation unit is detected, and the pressing operation of the firing stop button is not detected (launchable state). In addition, the output of the handle detection signal from the launch condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
At this time, as long as the launchable state is occurring, regardless of whether or not a launch permission signal is input from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection circuit 420 (regardless of the gaming machine state set in the main control board 200). The output of the handle detection signal from the launch condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
Further, as long as the launchable state is generated, communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400 regardless of whether or not a CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700 to the launch condition detection circuit 420. The output of the handle detection signal from the launch condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained regardless of whether it is in the state or not).
As described above, the main control board 200 can detect (grasp) whether or not the launchable state is occurring, and control the progress of the game, the content of the effect, etc. according to the occurrence status of the launchable state. It becomes possible to do.

That is, the main control board 200 can be fired when it detects that the handle detection signal has changed from a state in which it has not been input to a state in which it has been input (the handle detection signal has changed from a low level to a high level). A game status specification command for designating the occurrence (start) of a state is transmitted to the effect control board 300.
On the other hand, the main control board 200 can be fired when it detects that the handle detection signal has changed from the input state to the non-input state (the handle detection signal has changed from a high level to a low level). A game status specification command for designating the release (end) of the state is transmitted to the effect control board 300.
As a result, the effect control board 300 detects the occurrence of the launchable state by receiving the game status specification command that specifies the occurrence of the launchable state, and receives the game status specification command that specifies the release of the launchable state. It is possible to detect the release of the fireable state.
Then, the effect control board 300 can change the effect content depending on whether or not the launchable state is being generated.

(Structure of production control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the effect control board. FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a sound circuit. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the settings of the channel router.
The effect control board 300 controls the effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, movable body effect, etc.) based on the control command received from the main control board 200.
As shown in FIG. 5, the effect control board 300 includes a microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 301 and various external devices externally connected to the microcomputer 301.
In the present embodiment, various external devices include a control ROM 302, a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 303, a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) 304, a digital amplifier 305, and the like.

(Control ROM 302)
The control ROM 302 contains a control program for controlling the operation of the microcomputer 301, various data required for executing the control program, various command lists set in the control register of the sound circuit 323, and a digital amplifier 305. Various operation parameters (frequency correction parameters, etc.) and the like to be transmitted are stored. In particular, the control ROM 302 contains the effect scenario data corresponding to each effect number, the animation table corresponding to each display effect number, the command list corresponding to each sound effect control number, various compression lamp drive data, and various compression motor drives. Data is stored (stored).
The "compressed lamp drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) the lamp drive data in a predetermined format. The "lamp drive data" is data for driving various lamps 20 and 21 (data for designating the brightness values of the lamps 20 and 21 belonging to each system).
The "compressed motor drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) the motor drive data in a predetermined format. The "motor drive data" is data for driving various motors 23 (data that defines the output value of each motor 23).
In this embodiment, a NOR type flash memory (NOR type ROM) is used as the control ROM 302. Here, as the control ROM 302, an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) may be used.
The control ROM 302 is connected to the HOST interface 313 of the microcomputer 301.

(CGROM303)
Various compressed image data, various compressed audio data, and the like are stored (stored) in the CGROM 303.
The "compressed image data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) image data (material data) in a predetermined format. The "image data (material data)" is data of an image (moving image / still image) that is a material for drawing processing.
The "compressed audio data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) audio data in a predetermined format. The "voice data" is voice data output from various speakers 22.
In this embodiment, a NAND flash memory (NAND type ROM) is used as the CGROM 303. Specifically, the CGROM 303 is configured by an SSD (Solid State Drive) that uses a NAND flash memory as a storage unit.
The CGROM 303 is connected to the CG bus interface 314 of the microcomputer 301. The CG bus interface 314 is a SATA (Serial AT Attainment) standard connection interface. As a result, the reading of various data stored in the CGROM 303 is SATA-transferred.

(DRAM304)
The DRAM 304 is provided with a preload area. Various data (specifically, compressed image data, compressed audio data, etc.) stored in the CGROM 303 are transferred (preloaded) to the preload area.
Further, the DRAM 304 is provided with a drawing command buffer area. In the present embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the drawing command buffer area, and the DRAM 304 is provided with two drawing command buffer areas.
The two drawing command buffer areas have the same size. Of the two drawing command buffer areas, the other drawing command buffer area is designated as the transfer area while one drawing command buffer area is designated as the construction area. Further, for each drawing command buffer area, the designation of the construction area and the designation of the transfer area are alternately switched for each frame.
Then, for each drawing command buffer area, during the period specified in the construction area, the display list described later is stored (generated / constructed) in the drawing command buffer area, and during the period specified in the transfer area. , The display list stored in the drawing command buffer area is transferred to the VDP (specifically, the preloader circuit 319).
The DRAM 304 is connected to the DRAM interface 315 of the microcomputer 301.

(Microcomputer 301)
The microcomputer 301 is an LSI in which a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated.
The microcomputer 301 controls the effect operation by various effect means based on the control command received from the main control board 200.
The "various effect means" include various image display devices 31, 32, various speakers 22, various lamps 20, 21, and various motors 23 (various movable bodies). Therefore, in the "effect operation by various production means", the display of the production image by the various image display devices 31 and 32, the output of the sound by the various speakers 22, the driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20 and 21, and the various motors 23 (lighting). The drive of various movable bodies) is included.
The microcomputer 301 includes a CPU 310, a work memory for a CPU 311, a CPU interface 312, a host interface 313, a CG bus interface 314, a DRAM interface 315, a VRAM 316, a serial communication controller 317, a transfer circuit 318, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, and a graphic. It includes internal devices such as a CPU circuit 321 and a drawing circuit 322, and a sound circuit 323, and these internal devices are bus-connected to the data bus 324.

(CPU310)
The CPU 310 is connected to the HOST interface 313 via the CPU interface 312. Further, the main control board 200 is connected to the HOST interface 313, and control commands from the main control board 200 are input. Further, a data bus 324 is connected to the HOST interface 313.
As a result, the CPU 310 can receive a control command (subcommand) from the main control board 200 via the HOST interface 313.
Further, the CPU 310 can communicate with internal devices such as the serial communication controller 317, the preloader circuit 319, the display circuit 320, and the sound circuit 323 via the HOST interface 313 and the data bus 324. ..
Further, the CPU 310 can read various data (control program, control data, etc.) stored in the control ROM 302 via the HOST interface 313.
Further, the CPU 310 can read various data (compressed audio data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the HOST interface 313, the data bus 324, and the CG bus interface 314.
Further, the CPU 310 can read / write data to / from the DRAM 304 via the HOST interface 313, the data bus 324, and the DRAM interface 315.

The CPU 310 executes various arithmetic processes required for controlling the effect operation by the various effect means, control processes of the internal device corresponding to the various arithmetic processes, and the like.
At this time, the CPU 310 uses the CPU work memory (RAM) 311 and the DRAM 304 as a work area for various arithmetic processing, a buffer area for various arithmetic processing data, a table data area, a buffer area for various input / output data, and the like. do.
That is, the CPU 310 selects the effect (effect number) to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and selects and sets the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected effect number. In addition, command information (internal command) for controlling various internal devices (VDP, sound circuit 323, lamp controller 317a, motor controller 317b, etc.) is sequentially generated according to the selected / set effect scenario data.

Specifically, the CPU 310 sets the animation table in the animation table setting area according to the command information. Then, a display list is generated in the drawing command buffer area specified in the construction area according to the set animation table.
The "display list" is a collection of drawing commands for one frame. That is, the drawing commands for one frame are described in the display list in a predetermined order. Then, in the VDP, the drawing data for one frame is generated by executing the processing based on each drawing command in the order described in the display list.
The "drawing command" is information that specifies the content of the drawing process (drawing control) to be executed by VDP. In particular, the drawing command includes the address of the storage area in which the compressed image data used for drawing is stored (hereinafter referred to as "image address"), the magnification (magnification / reduction ratio) at the time of drawing the image data, and the said. The coordinates for drawing the image data (coordinates in the frame buffer area), the transparency at the time of drawing the image data (transparency, transparency, transparency), and the like are specified.

Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304.
That is, the NAND flash memory such as the CGROM 303 can easily increase the capacity as compared with the NOR flash memory such as the control ROM 302, but the data reading speed is slow. Therefore, if the compressed audio data is directly read from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the audio output process is executed by the sound circuit 323, the processing performance may be significantly deteriorated.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, before the audio output processing is executed, the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means having a faster data reading speed than the CGROM 303. .. Then, the compressed audio data is read from the DRAM 304 when the audio output process is executed, so that the processing performance is prevented from being deteriorated.

Specifically, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) a predetermined compressed audio data among the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304. At this time, in the present embodiment, all the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304. Here, among the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303, a part of the compressed audio data may be transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304.
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, after the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it is possible to control the audio output by the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound circuit 323). In other words, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to control the audio output by the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound circuit 323).
Further, after the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it is possible to control the display of the effect image (drawing process by VDP) by the various image display devices 31 and 32. In other words, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to control the display of the effect image (drawing process by VDP) by the various image display devices 31 and 32. ..
On the other hand, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it is possible to control the driving (light emission) of the lamps 20 and 21 (the lamp driving process by the lamp controller 317a).
Further, before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, the drive control of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive process by the motor controller 317b) can be executed.

(Transfer circuit 318)
The transfer circuit 318 executes the transfer of various data between internal devices.
Specifically, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list stored in the drawing command buffer area designated in the transfer area to the preloader circuit 319. Further, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 to the drawing circuit 322.

(VRAM316)
The VRAM 316 is provided with an image development area. Then, the image data (material data) expanded (restored / decoded) by the graphics decoder circuit 321 is temporarily stored in the image expansion area.
Further, the VRAM 316 is provided with a frame buffer area. In the present embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the frame buffer area, and the VRAM 316 is provided with two frame buffer areas.
The two frame buffer areas have the same size. Of the two frame buffer areas, the other frame buffer area is designated as the output area while one frame buffer area is designated as the drawing area. Further, for each frame buffer area, the designation of the drawing area and the designation of the output area are alternately switched for each frame.
Then, for each frame buffer area, during the period designated for the drawing area, the drawing data for one frame is stored (generated / drawn) in the frame buffer area, and during the period designated for the output area. , The output of the video signal is executed based on the drawing data for one frame stored in the frame buffer area.

(VDP)
In the microcomputer 301, the preloader circuit 319, the display circuit 320, the graphics decoder circuit 321 and the drawing circuit 322 function as a VDP (Video Display Processor).
The VDP controls the display of the effect image by the various image display devices 31 and 32. Specifically, the VDP generates drawing data in response to receiving a display list (drawing command) from the CPU 310, generates a video signal based on the generated drawing data, and uses the generated video signal as various images. Output to display devices 31 and 32.
The preloader circuit 319 can read various data (compressed image data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the CG bus interface 314.
In particular, the preloader circuit 319 transfers (preloads) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 before the drawing process by the drawing circuit 322 is executed.
That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory such as the CGROM 303 can easily increase the capacity as compared with the NOR flash memory such as the control ROM 302, but the data reading speed is slow. Therefore, if the compressed image data is directly read from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the drawing process is executed by the drawing circuit 322, the processing performance may be significantly deteriorated.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, before the drawing process is executed, the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means having a faster data reading speed than the CGROM 303. Then, the compressed image data is read from the DRAM 304 when the drawing process is executed, thereby preventing the processing performance from being deteriorated.

Specifically, each time the preloader circuit 319 receives the display list, the compressed image data for one frame specified in the display list among the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 is stored in the preload area of the DRAM 304. Transfer (preload) to. At this time, the preloader circuit 319 rewrites the display list.
That is, in the display list generated by the CPU 310, an address that specifies the storage area of the CGROM 303 is described as an image address included in each drawing command. Therefore, the preloader circuit 319 stores compressed image data stored in the storage area (storage area of the CGROM 303) designated by the image address included in the drawing command for each drawing command included in the display list in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304. After transferring to, the image address included in the drawing command is rewritten to an address that specifies the storage area (predetermined area of DRAM 304) after transfer. This will generate a new display list with the image address rewritten.
Here, in the present embodiment, the preloader circuit 319 is configured to transfer (preload) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304. However, the preloader circuit 319 may be configured to transfer the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a predetermined area (preload area) of the VRAM 316.
The display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 is transferred to the drawing circuit 320 by the transfer circuit 318.

The drawing circuit 322 stores (generates / draws) drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area according to the display list received from the preloader circuit 319.
Specifically, each time the drawing circuit 320 receives the display list, the drawing circuit 320 reads out the compressed image data for one frame specified in the display list from the DRAM 304. The compressed image data for one frame read from the DRAM 304 is restored (decoded / decoded) by the graphic decoder circuit 321 and stored (expanded) in the image expansion area of the VRAM 316. Then, the drawing circuit 320 uses the image data stored in the image development area to generate drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated in the drawing area.

The display circuit 320 generates a video signal based on the drawing data for one frame stored (generated / drawn) in the frame buffer area designated as the output area, and displays the generated video signal in various images. Output to devices 31 and 32. In this embodiment, a digital RGB signal is output as a video signal. Here, as a video signal, an LVDS (Low voltage differential signaling) signal may be output.
Specifically, the display circuit 320 includes a data acquisition circuit (not shown), a scaler circuit (not shown), a color correction circuit (not shown), a ditherer circuit (not shown), and a synchronous signal generation circuit (not shown). It is composed of including) and the like.
The data acquisition circuit reads the drawing data stored in the frame buffer area specified in the output area.
The scaler circuit can perform scaling processing (enlargement processing / reduction processing) on the drawing data read by the data acquisition circuit.
The color correction circuit can perform color correction processing on the drawing data after processing by the scaler circuit.
The dither circuit can perform dithering processing on the drawing data after processing by the color correction circuit.
Then, the drawing data after processing by the dithering circuit is output as a video signal (digital RGB signal).
The synchronization signal generation circuit generates a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal (Vsync). Then, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs the generated horizontal synchronization signal and vertical synchronization signal to the various image display devices 31 and 32. Further, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs the generated vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310.
Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image (display of the effect image based on the drawing data for one frame) in each of the image display devices 31 and 32 is updated every 16.66 [ms]. Therefore, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs a vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310 (set to a high level) every 16.66 [ms].

(Sound circuit 323)
The sound circuit 323 (built-in sound source) controls the output (reproduction) of sound (directed sound) by various speakers 22.
As shown in FIG. 52, the sound circuit 323 includes 40 tracks (tracks 1 to 40), 8 audio buses (audio buses 1 to 8), and 8 channels (channels 1 to channel 8). 8) and a control register (not shown) are included.
In the present embodiment, the various speakers 22 include an upper left speaker, an upper right speaker, a left middle speaker, a right middle speaker, a lower speaker, and a woofer. Then, one speaker is connected (electrically connected) to each channel via the digital amplifier 305. Specifically, the upper left speaker is connected to channel 1, the upper right speaker is connected to channel 2, the left middle speaker is connected to channel 3, the right middle speaker is connected to channel 4, and the lower speaker is connected to channel 5. , A woofer is connected to channel 6. On the other hand, no speaker is connected to channels 7 and 8.
Here, the upper left speaker, the upper right speaker, the left middle speaker, and the right middle speaker are configured as high-frequency / mid-range speakers (full-range speakers). On the other hand, the lower speaker and the woofer are configured as a low-frequency speaker. The woofer has a lower frequency band that can be output (in a frequency band having a lower frequency characteristic) and a larger output (W) than the lower speaker.
The sound circuit 323 is equipped with an independent sequencer (not shown) for each track. This makes it possible to independently control the playback, stop, volume, etc. of audio data for each track.
Each track is provided with a compressed audio decoder 351, a track volume control unit 352, a programmable pan 353, and the like.
The compressed audio decoder 351 restores (decodes / decodes) the compressed sound data. The track volume control unit 352 sets the volume of the track. The programmable pan 353 controls the localization of sound by outputting the audio data of the track to an arbitrary audio bus.

The eight audio buses are provided with a switcher 354, a ducking control unit 355, a first channel volume control unit 356, and the like.
The switcher 354 allocates the audio data of the eight audio buses and the audio data of the eight external serial inputs (not shown) to the eight audio buses. In this embodiment, the eight external serial inputs are not used. The ducking control unit 355 ducks (decreases) the volume of the other audio bus based on the volume of the audio data input from the predetermined audio bus among the eight audio buses. The first channel volume control unit 356 sets the connection between each audio bus (audio bus 1 to audio bus 8) and each channel (channel 1 to channel 8).

As shown in FIG. 54, in the present embodiment, the audio bus 1 and the channel 1 are connected by the first channel volume control unit 356. Further, the audio signal generated by channel 1 is input to the upper left speaker. As a result, the voice based on the voice data assigned to the audio bus 1 is output by the upper left speaker.
Further, the audio bus 2 and the channel 2 are connected by the first channel volume control unit 356. Further, the audio signal generated by the channel 2 is input to the upper right speaker. As a result, the voice based on the voice data assigned to the audio bus 2 is output by the upper right speaker.
Further, the audio bus 3 and the channel 3 are connected by the first channel volume control unit 356. Further, the audio signal generated by the channel 3 is input to the left middle speaker. As a result, the voice based on the voice data assigned to the audio bus 3 is output by the left middle speaker.
Further, the audio bus 4 and the channel 4 are connected by the first channel volume control unit 356. Further, the audio signal generated by the channel 4 is input to the right middle speaker. As a result, the voice based on the voice data assigned to the audio bus 4 is output by the right middle speaker.
Further, the audio bus 5 and the channel 5 are connected by the first channel volume control unit 356. Further, the audio signal generated by the channel 5 is input to the lower speaker. As a result, the voice based on the voice data assigned to the audio bus 5 is output by the lower speaker.
Further, the audio bus 6 and the channel 6 are connected by the first channel volume control unit 356. Further, the audio signal generated by the channel 6 is input to the woofer. As a result, the voice based on the voice data assigned to the audio bus 6 is output by the woofer.
Further, the audio bus 7 and the channel 6 are connected by the first channel volume control unit 356. As a result, the voice based on the voice data assigned to the audio bus 7 is output by the woofer.
On the other hand, the audio bus 8 is not connected to any channel by the first channel volume control unit 356.
As described above, in the present embodiment, channels 7 and 8 are not used, and audio data is not input.

The eight channels include a second channel volume control unit 357, an equalizer 358, a limiter 359, a post effector 360, an overall volume control unit 361, an audio serial output 362, and the like.
The second channel volume control unit 357 sets the volume of each channel. The equalizer 358 sets emphasis / reduction of a specific frequency band (corrects the frequency) for each channel. In this embodiment, the equalizer 358 is not used. The limiter 359 prevents clipping by compressing the sound exceeding the threshold for each channel. The post-effector 360 sets the emphasis / reduction of a specific frequency band, the volume, the delay of the sounding timing, and the like for each channel. The overall volume control unit 361 sets the volume for all channels at once. The audio serial output 362 converts the audio data of each channel for serial transmission to the digital amplifier 305.

The CPU 310 sets the command list read from the control ROM 302 in the control register of the sound circuit 323 according to the command information. As a result, the sound circuit 323 operates according to the command list set in the control register.
The "command list" is information that specifies the operation of the sound circuit 323. As described above, the command list corresponding to each sound production control number is stored.
In the present embodiment, as a command list, a command list for designating the start of the sound effect, a command list for specifying the volume adjustment, a command list for specifying the end of the sound effect, and the like are defined.
The command list that specifies the start of sound production includes information that specifies the compressed audio data to start playback, information that specifies the track to which the compressed audio data is assigned, information that specifies the number of times the compressed audio data is played, and the compression. Information that specifies the volume of the audio data (audio data), information that specifies the panpot ratio of the compressed audio data (audio data), and the like are included.
The "panpot ratio" is information for designating an audio bus (audio bus 1 to audio bus 8) to which audio data is assigned. In other words, the panpot ratio is information that specifies the volume of each audio bus when allocating audio data to each audio bus. In the present embodiment, the volume balance of eight audio buses (audio bus 1 to audio bus 8) is specified by the panpot ratio. Specifically, the ratio of the volume of the audio bus 1 to the audio bus 8 is specified by the panpot ratio.
On the other hand, the command list for specifying the volume adjustment includes information for specifying the track for adjusting the volume, information for specifying the content of the adjustment, and the like.
On the other hand, the command list for designating the end of the sound effect includes information for designating the track to stop the playback.
As described above, in the present embodiment, playback, stop, volume adjustment, etc. of audio data are controlled for each track.

(Serial communication controller 317)
The serial communication controller 317 includes a lamp controller 317a and a motor controller 317b.
The lamp controller 317a controls the driving (light emission) of the various lamps 20 and 21.
Specifically, the CPU 310 sets the LED register according to the command information (message) set in the lamp command buffer area described later. Then, the lamp controller 317a generates lamp drive data according to the setting of the LED register, and outputs the generated lamp drive data together with the clock signal to the lamp drivers 332 and 342. At this time, the lamp drive data is output as serial data.
The lamp controller 317a includes a lamp decoder circuit (not shown). The lamp decoder circuit reads the compressed lamp drive data specified in the command information from the control ROM 302. In addition, the read compression lamp drive data is restored (decoded / decoded). Then, the lamp drive data is generated based on the restored lamp drive data, and the generated lamp drive data is output to the lamp drivers 332 and 342.

The motor controller 317b controls the drive of various motors 23 (various movable bodies).
Specifically, the CPU 310 sets the motor register according to the command information (message) set in the movable body command buffer area described later. Then, the motor controller 317b generates motor drive data according to the setting of the motor register, and outputs the generated motor drive data to the motor drivers 333 and 343 together with the clock signal. At this time, the motor drive data is output as serial data.
The motor controller 317b includes a motor sequencer circuit (not shown). The motor sequencer circuit reads the compression motor drive data specified in the command information from the control ROM 302. In addition, the read compression motor drive data is restored (decoded / decoded). Then, the motor drive data is generated based on the restored motor drive data, and the generated motor drive data is output to the motor drivers 333 and 343.
Further, information indicating the detection status of the various sensors 24 is input from the driver board 330 to the motor controller 317b, information indicating the detection status of the switches 25 to 29 from the sub-connection board 340, and various sensors 24. Information indicating the detection status of is input.

(About suppression of current consumption by ducking function)
Next, suppression of current consumption (power consumption) by the ducking function will be described.
FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating a ducking function. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the contents of the command list corresponding to the sound effects A and B.
The pachinko machine 1 has an overcurrent protection circuit (not shown) in a path for supplying current (power supply) from the power supply board 600 to various devices (various lamps 20, 21, various speakers 22, various motors 23, etc.). Is provided. The overcurrent protection circuit cuts off (or limits) the output of the current to various devices when the output of the current exceeding a predetermined value is detected.
Here, the output (W) of the woofer is larger than that of other speakers (upper left speaker, upper right speaker, left middle speaker, right middle speaker, and lower speaker). Therefore, when the volume of the sound output from the woofer is increased, the current consumed by the woofer is increased, and as a result, the total current consumed by the various speakers 22 is increased, the overcurrent protection circuit is activated, and the current output to various devices is output. It may be blocked (or restricted).
On the other hand, in the sound production composed of the sounds output by the various speakers 22 (upper left speaker, upper right speaker, left middle speaker, right middle speaker, lower speaker, and woofer), the volume of the sound output by the woofer is lowered. If this is done, the impression of the bass range will be weakened, the image of the sound effect will be impaired, and the effect of the sound effect may be reduced.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the increase in the total volume output by the various speakers 22 is suppressed by using the ducking function of the ducking control unit 355, thereby suppressing the increase in the total current consumption by the various speakers 22. At this time, in the present embodiment, when the volume of the sound output from the woofer exceeds a predetermined threshold (threshold value), the volume of the sound output from the other speaker is reduced. Specifically, when the volume of the sound output from the woofer exceeds the threshold value, the volume of the sound output from the lower speaker whose frequency characteristics overlap with the woofer (the frequency band that can be output overlaps) is reduced. It is said.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the image of the sound effect from being spoiled (prevent the impression of the bass range from being weakened), and to suppress an increase in the total current consumption by the various speakers 22.
The "total volume output by the various speakers 22" is output by all the speakers (upper left speaker, upper right speaker, left middle speaker, right middle speaker, lower speaker, and woofer) during the execution of one sound effect. It is the maximum value of the total volume.
"Total current consumption by various speakers 22" is the total consumption output by all the speakers (upper left speaker, upper right speaker, left middle speaker, right middle speaker, lower speaker, and woofer) during the execution of one sound effect. It is the maximum value of the current.

Here, in a sound production in which the total current consumed by the various speakers 22 exceeds a predetermined value due to the volume of the sound output from the woofer exceeding the threshold value (hereinafter referred to as "loud sound production"), the sound is output from the woofer. The overcurrent protection circuit may be activated when the volume of the loudspeaker exceeds the threshold value. Therefore, in the loud sound production, when the volume output from the woofer exceeds the threshold value, it is necessary to reduce the volume of the sound output from another speaker (specifically, the lower speaker).
On the other hand, in the sound production in which the total current consumed by the various speakers 22 does not exceed a predetermined value even if the volume of the sound output from the woofer exceeds the threshold value (hereinafter referred to as "low volume sound production"), the woofer is used. There is no risk that the overcurrent protection circuit will operate when the volume of the output sound exceeds the threshold value. Therefore, in the low volume sound effect, it is not necessary to reduce the volume of the sound output from the other speaker (specifically, the lower speaker) even when the volume output from the woofer exceeds the threshold value.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the audio buses 1 to 8, the audio bus 8 to which the speaker is not connected (the audio bus 8 in which the audio signal based on the assigned audio data is not output to the speaker) ) Is used to control the activation / non-operation of the ducking function according to the type of sound production (loud sound production / low volume sound production).

That is, in the present embodiment, the ducking control unit 355 is set to reduce (ducking) the volume of the audio bus 5 to which the lower speaker is connected based on the input of the audio bus 8 to which the speaker is not connected. It is said.
Specifically, the ducking control unit 355 constantly monitors the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 8 while the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 8 is increased. When the threshold value is exceeded, the ducking function is activated to reduce (decrease / limit / suppress) the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 5. Further, as a setting, when the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 8 becomes equal to or less than the threshold value after the ducking function is activated, the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 5 is restored to the original volume. There is.
Then, in the command list that specifies the start of the loud sound effect, the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 among the audio data constituting the loud sound effect is transferred to the audio bus 8 at the same volume as the audio bus 6. The panpot ratio is specified so that it can also be assigned.
As a result, when the loud sound effect is executed, the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 is also assigned to the audio bus 8 at the same volume as the audio bus 6. That is, the same audio data is assigned to the audio bus 6 and the audio bus 8 at the same volume. As a result, the ducking control unit 355 reduces the volume of the voice data assigned to the audio bus 5 when the volume of the voice data assigned to the audio bus 8 exceeds the threshold value. In other words, the ducking control unit 355 reduces the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 5 when the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 exceeds the threshold value. Therefore, when the volume of the sound output from the woofer exceeds the threshold value, the volume of the sound output from the lower speaker can be reduced.
On the other hand, in the command list that specifies the start of the low volume sound effect, the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 among the audio data constituting the low volume sound effect is panned so as not to be assigned to the audio bus 8. The pot ratio is specified. That is, in the command list that specifies the start of the low volume sound effect, the audio data is not assigned to the audio bus 8.
As a result, when the low volume sound effect is executed, the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 is not assigned to the audio bus 8. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound output from the woofer exceeds the threshold value, the volume of the sound output from the lower speaker is not reduced.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1, sound effect A and sound effect B are defined as types of sound effect. The sound production A is a loud sound production. On the other hand, the sound effect B is a low volume sound effect.
That is, in the sound effect A, the volume output from the woofer exceeds the threshold value at a predetermined timing. Then, in the sound effect A, when the volume output from the woofer exceeds the threshold value, the total current consumed by the various speakers 22 may exceed a predetermined value, and the overcurrent protection circuit may operate.
Therefore, in the sound effect A, when the volume output from the woofer exceeds the threshold value, the ducking function is activated to reduce the volume output from the lower speaker.
On the other hand, in the sound effect B, the volume output from the woofer exceeds the threshold value at a predetermined timing. However, in the sound effect B, even if the volume output from the woofer exceeds the threshold value, the total current consumed by the various speakers 22 does not exceed a predetermined value, and there is no risk that the overcurrent protection circuit will operate.
Therefore, in the sound effect B, even if the volume output from the woofer exceeds the threshold value, the ducking function does not operate and the volume output from the lower speaker is maintained.
Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

The sound effect A is composed of voice data A (compressed voice data A), voice data B (compressed voice data B), voice data C (compressed voice data C), and voice data D (compressed voice data D). It is composed.
The voice data A is vocal voice data. The voice data B is the voice data of the guitar sound. The voice data C is the voice data of the bass sound 1. The voice data D is the voice data of the bass sound 2.
Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the command list (hereinafter referred to as "command list A") for designating the start of the sound effect A, the audio data A (compressed audio data A) is reproduced and the audio data is recorded. B (compressed audio data B) reproduction, audio data C (compressed audio data C) reproduction, and audio data D (compressed audio data D) reproduction are designated.
Further, in the command list A, the audio data A is assigned (output) to each audio bus 1, 2, 3, 4 at a predetermined volume, and the audio data B is assigned (output) to each audio bus 1, 2, 3, 4. The audio data C is assigned (output) at a predetermined volume to the audio bus 5, and the audio data D is assigned (output) at a predetermined volume to the audio buses 6 and 8. The panpot ratio is specified so that it can be assigned (output) by.
In particular, in the command list A, the panpot ratio is defined so that the audio data D is assigned to the audio buses 6 and 8 at the same volume.
As a result, in the sound effect A, the voice data A is reproduced by each audio bus 1, 2, 3, 4 (each channel 1, 2, 3, 4), and the voice (vocal) based on the voice data A is on the upper left. It is output by the speaker, the upper right speaker, the left middle speaker, and the right middle speaker. Further, the audio data B is reproduced by each audio bus 1, 2, 3, 4 (each channel 1, 2, 3, 4), and the audio (guitar sound) based on the audio data B is the upper left speaker, the upper right speaker, and so on. It is output by the left middle speaker and the right middle speaker. Further, the audio data C is reproduced by the audio bus 5 (channel 5), and the audio (base sound 1) based on the audio data C is output by the lower speaker. Further, the audio data D is reproduced by the audio bus 6 (channel 6), and the audio (base sound 2) based on the audio data D is output by the woofer.
In particular, the ducking control unit 355 monitors the volume of the compressed data D assigned to the audio bus 8, and when the volume of the compressed data D exceeds the threshold value, the compressed data C assigned to the audio bus 5 is monitored. The volume is reduced. Further, when the volume of the compressed data D becomes equal to or less than the threshold value, the volume of the compressed data C assigned to the audio bus 5 is restored to the original volume specified in the command list A.
As described above, in the sound effect A, the volume of the audio data D assigned to the audio buses 6 and 8 exceeds the threshold value at a predetermined timing. At this time, the volume of the compressed data C assigned to the audio bus 5 is reached. Is reduced.
As a result, even if the volume of the audio data D assigned to the audio buses 6 and 8 exceeds the threshold value, the total current consumed by the various speakers 22 does not exceed a predetermined value, and the overcurrent protection circuit is prevented from operating. It becomes possible.
In particular, when the volume of the sound output by the woofer exceeds the threshold value, it is possible to suppress an increase in the total current consumption by the various speakers 22 while maintaining the volume of the sound output by the woofer.

The sound effect B consists of voice data E (compressed voice data E), voice data F (compressed voice data F), voice data G (compressed voice data G), and voice data H (compressed voice data H). It is composed.
The voice data E is vocal voice data. The voice data F is the voice data of the guitar sound. The voice data G is the voice data of the bass sound 1. The voice data H is the voice data of the bass sound 2.
Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), in the command list (hereinafter referred to as "command list B") for designating the start of the sound effect B, the audio data E (compressed audio data E) is reproduced and the audio data is recorded. Reproduction of F (compressed audio data F), reproduction of audio data G (compressed audio data G), and reproduction of audio data H (compressed audio data H) are specified.
Further, in the command list B, the audio data E is assigned (output) to each audio bus 1, 2, 3, 4 at a predetermined volume, and the audio data F is assigned (output) to each audio bus 1, 2, 3, 4. Is assigned (output) at a predetermined volume to the audio data G, the audio data G is assigned (output) at a predetermined volume to the audio bus 5, and the audio data H is assigned to each audio bus 6 at a predetermined volume. The panpot ratio is specified so that it can be (output). In the command list B, compressed data is not assigned to the audio bus 8.
As a result, in the sound effect B, the voice data E is reproduced by each audio bus 1, 2, 3, 4 (each channel 1, 2, 3, 4), and the voice (vocal) based on the voice data E is on the upper left. It is output by the speaker, the upper right speaker, the left middle speaker, and the right middle speaker. Further, the audio data F is reproduced by each audio bus 1, 2, 3, 4 (each channel 1, 2, 3, 4), and the audio (guitar sound) based on the audio data F is the upper left speaker, the upper right speaker, and so on. It is output by the left middle speaker and the right middle speaker. Further, the audio data G is reproduced by the audio bus 5 (channel 5), and the audio (base sound 1) based on the audio data G is output by the lower speaker. Further, the audio data H is reproduced by the audio bus 6 (channel 6), and the audio (base sound 2) based on the audio data H is output by the woofer.
In particular, the ducking control unit 355 monitors the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 8, but in the sound effect B, the audio data is not assigned to the audio bus 8, so that the ducking function is activated. There is no.
That is, in the sound effect B, the volume of the audio data H assigned to the audio bus 6 exceeds the threshold value at a predetermined timing, but even if the volume of the audio data H assigned to the audio bus 6 exceeds the threshold value, The total current consumed by the various speakers 22 does not exceed a predetermined value, and the overcurrent protection circuit does not operate.
Therefore, when the volume of the audio data H assigned to the audio bus 6 exceeds the threshold value, it is not necessary to reduce the volume of the audio data G assigned to the audio bus 5.
Therefore, in the command list B, the audio data H assigned to the audio bus 6 is not assigned to the audio bus 8 so that the ducking function is not activated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 is assigned to the audio buses 6 and 8 by allocating the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 to the audio bus 8 at the same volume as the audio bus 6 for the loud sound effect. When the volume of the assigned audio data exceeds the threshold value, the ducking function is activated and the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 5 can be reduced, and as a result, the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 can be reduced. It is possible to suppress an increase in the total current consumption of various speakers 22 without reducing the volume.
On the other hand, for the low volume sound effect, by not allocating the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 to the audio bus 8, ducking even when the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 exceeds the threshold value. The function does not operate, and it becomes possible to maintain the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 5.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to control the operation / non-operation of the ducking function depending on whether or not the audio data is assigned to the audio bus 8. Therefore, it is possible to control the operation / non-operation of the ducking function in units of voice data.

(Adjustment of volume level)
Next, the adjustment of the volume level of the sound output from the speaker 22 will be described.
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of a volume value set in the channel router setting register. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the contents of the volume value setting table.
The pachinko machine 1 has a function capable of adjusting the volume level of the speaker 22 based on an operation by the player, and a manager of the pachinko machine 1 (an employee of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc.). A function for adjusting the volume level of the speaker 22 based on the operation is provided individually.
That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the saucer unit 5 is provided with a volume adjustment button. The volume adjustment button can be operated by the player. Then, by operating the volume adjustment button, it is possible to adjust the volume level of the sound output from the speaker 22.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, a volume changeover switch (not shown) is provided on the effect control board 300. The volume changeover switch can be operated by the administrator of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated by the player. Then, by operating the volume changeover switch, it is possible to adjust the volume level of the sound output from the speaker 22.
In the present embodiment, the volume level of the sound output from the speaker 22 is adjusted by the first channel volume control unit 356 according to each operation of the volume adjustment button and the volume changeover switch.
The volume level adjustment will be described in detail below.
In the following description, the volume adjustment button and the volume changeover switch are collectively referred to as a "volume adjustment operation unit".

The sound circuit 323 is provided with a channel router setting register in which a volume value (parameter) is set (stored). Then, the first channel volume control unit 356 transfers from each audio bus (audio bus 1 to audio bus 8) to each channel (channel 1 to channel 8) according to the volume value set in the channel router setting register. Set (adjust) the volume of the transmitted audio data.
As shown in FIG. 57, a volume value that specifies the volume of audio data transmitted from the audio bus to the channel is set in the channel router setting register for each combination of each audio bus and each channel. A volume value setting area is provided.
That is, the channel router setting register sets the volume value setting area in which the volume value for specifying the volume for allocating the audio data of the audio bus to channel 1 is set for each audio bus, and the audio data of the audio bus to channel 2. The volume value setting area where the volume value for specifying the volume to be assigned is set, the volume value setting area for which the volume value for specifying the volume for assigning the audio data of the audio bus to channel 3 is set, and the audio data of the audio bus. The volume value setting area where the volume value is set to specify the volume to be assigned to channel 4, the volume value setting area where the volume value to specify the volume to assign the audio data of the audio bus to channel 5 is set, and the audio Volume value setting area where the volume value that specifies the volume to assign the audio data of the bus to channel 6 is set, and volume value setting area where the volume value that specifies the volume to assign the audio data of the audio bus to channel 7 is set. And a volume value setting area in which a volume value for designating the volume for allocating the audio data of the audio bus to the channel 8 is set.
As a result, the channel router setting register is provided with eight volume value setting areas (volume value setting areas corresponding to each of channels 1 to 8) as volume value setting areas corresponding to each audio bus.

In each volume value setting area, any value from "0" to "255" is set as the volume value. Then, the audio data of the audio bus corresponding to the volume value setting area is assigned to the channel corresponding to the volume value setting area at the volume corresponding to the volume value set in each volume value setting area.
At this time, if the volume value set in the volume value setting area is "0", the audio data of the audio bus corresponding to the volume value setting area is assigned to the channel corresponding to the volume value setting area. I can't.
On the other hand, when the volume value set in the volume value setting area is a value of "1" or more, the audio data of the audio bus corresponding to the volume value setting area is the channel corresponding to the volume value setting area. Assigned to. In this case, the larger the volume value set in the volume value setting area, the larger the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus corresponding to the volume value setting area.

In the present embodiment, among the eight volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 1, the volume value set in the volume value setting area corresponding to the channel 1 (hereinafter referred to as “variable volume value setting area 1”) is provided. , It is possible to change according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit, and for the volume value set in the volume value setting area corresponding to other channels (channels 2 to 8), each volume adjustment operation unit It is impossible to change according to the operation of.
In particular, among the eight volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 1, a value of "1" or more is set in the volume value setting area (variable volume value setting area 1) corresponding to the channel 1, and the other channels are set. In the corresponding volume value setting area, "0" is always set.
As a result, the audio data of the audio bus 1 is assigned only to the channel 1 and not to other channels. Here, the audio data of other audio buses (audio buses 2 to 8) is not assigned to the channel 1. Then, the volume of the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 1 to the channel 1 can be adjusted according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. In other words, it is possible to adjust the volume of the audio output from the upper left speaker (audio based on the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 1 to the channel 1) according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. ing.

On the other hand, among the eight volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 2, the volume values set in the volume value setting area corresponding to the channel 2 (hereinafter referred to as "variable volume value setting area 2") are each volume. It is possible to change according to the operation of the adjustment operation unit, and the volume value set in the volume value setting area corresponding to other channels (channels 1, 3 to 8) can be changed in each volume adjustment operation unit. It is impossible to change it according to the operation.
In particular, among the eight volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 2, a value of "1" or more is set in the volume value setting area (variable volume value setting area 2) corresponding to the channel 2, and the other channels are set. In the corresponding volume value setting area, "0" is always set.
As a result, the audio data of the audio bus 2 is assigned only to the channel 2 and not to other channels. Here, the audio data of other audio buses (audio buses 1, 3 to 8) is not assigned to the channel 2. Then, the volume of the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 2 to the channel 2 can be adjusted according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. In other words, it is possible to adjust the volume of the audio output from the upper right speaker (audio based on the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 2 to the channel 2) according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. ing.

On the other hand, among the eight volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 3, the volume values set in the volume value setting area corresponding to channel 3 (hereinafter referred to as "variable volume value setting area 3") are each volume. It is possible to change according to the operation of the adjustment operation unit, and each volume adjustment operation for the volume value set in the volume value setting area corresponding to other channels (channels 1, 2, 4 to 8). It is impossible to change it according to the operation of the part.
In particular, among the eight volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 3, a value of "1" or more is set in the volume value setting area (variable volume value setting area 3) corresponding to the channel 3, and the other channels are set. In the corresponding volume value setting area, "0" is always set.
As a result, the audio data of the audio bus 3 is assigned only to the channel 3 and not to other channels. Here, the audio data of other audio buses (audio buses 1, 2, 4 to 8) is not assigned to the channel 3. Then, the volume of the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 3 to the channel 3 can be adjusted according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. In other words, it is possible to adjust the volume of the audio output from the left middle speaker (audio based on the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 3 to the channel 3) according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. It has become.

On the other hand, among the eight volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 4, the volume values set in the volume value setting area corresponding to the channel 4 (hereinafter referred to as "variable volume value setting area 4") are each volume. It is possible to change according to the operation of the adjustment operation unit, and each volume adjustment operation for the volume value set in the volume value setting area corresponding to other channels (channels 1 to 3, 5 to 8). It is impossible to change it according to the operation of the part.
In particular, among the eight volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 4, a value of "1" or more is set in the volume value setting area (variable volume value setting area 4) corresponding to the channel 4, and the other channels are set. In the corresponding volume value setting area, "0" is always set.
As a result, the audio data of the audio bus 4 is assigned only to the channel 4 and not to other channels. Here, the audio data of other audio buses (audio buses 1-3, 5 to 8) is not assigned to the channel 4. Then, the volume of the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 4 to the channel 4 can be adjusted according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. In other words, it is possible to adjust the volume of the audio output from the right middle speaker (audio based on the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 4 to the channel 4) according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. It has become.

On the other hand, among the eight volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 5, the volume values set in the volume value setting area corresponding to the channel 5 (hereinafter referred to as "variable volume value setting area 5") are each volume. It is possible to change according to the operation of the adjustment operation unit, and each volume adjustment operation for the volume value set in the volume value setting area corresponding to other channels (channels 1 to 4, 6 to 8). It is impossible to change it according to the operation of the part.
In particular, among the eight volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 5, a value of "1" or more is set in the volume value setting area (variable volume value setting area 5) corresponding to the channel 5, and the other channels are set. In the corresponding volume value setting area, "0" is always set.
As a result, the audio data of the audio bus 5 is assigned only to the channel 5 and not to other channels. Here, the audio data of other audio buses (audio buses 1 to 4, 6 to 8) is not assigned to the channel 5. Then, the volume of the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 5 to the channel 5 can be adjusted according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. In other words, it is possible to adjust the volume of the audio output from the lower speaker (audio based on the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 5 to the channel 5) according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. ing.

On the other hand, among the eight volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 6, the volume values set in the volume value setting area corresponding to the channel 6 (hereinafter referred to as "variable volume value setting area 6") are each volume. It is possible to change according to the operation of the adjustment operation unit, and each volume adjustment operation for the volume value set in the volume value setting area corresponding to other channels (channels 1 to 5, 7, 8). It is impossible to change it according to the operation of the part.
In particular, among the eight volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 6, a value of "1" or more is set in the volume value setting area (variable volume value setting area 6) corresponding to the channel 6, and the other channels are set. In the corresponding volume value setting area, "0" is always set.
As a result, the audio data of the audio bus 6 is assigned only to the channel 6 and not to other channels. Here, as will be described later, the audio data of the audio bus 7 is also assigned to the channel 6. Then, the volume of the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 6 to the channel 6 can be adjusted according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. In other words, it is possible to adjust the volume of the sound output from the woofer based on the sound data transmitted from the audio bus 6 to the channel 6 according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. ing.

On the other hand, it is impossible to change the volume values set in all the volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 7 according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit.
In particular, among the eight volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 7, in the volume value setting area corresponding to channel 6 (hereinafter referred to as "specific volume value setting area"), a predetermined value (in the present embodiment) is always used. , Maximum value = "255") is set, and "0" is always set in the volume value setting area corresponding to other channels (channels 1 to 5, 7, 8). Here, with respect to the "predetermined value", it is possible to appropriately specify a value of "1" or more so as to produce the effect intended by the developer.
As a result, the audio data of the audio bus 7 is assigned only to the channel 6 and not to other channels. The volume of the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 7 to the channel 6 is fixed at a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, the maximum value = "255"), and is adjusted according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. It is impossible to change. In other words, among the voices output from the woofer, the volume of the voices based on the voice data transmitted from the audio bus 7 to the channel 6 is set to a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, the maximum value = "255"). It is fixed and cannot be changed according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit.

On the other hand, it is impossible to change the volume values set in all the volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 8 according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit.
In particular, "0" is always set in all the volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 7.
As a result, the audio data of the audio bus 8 is not assigned to any channel (channels 1 to 8).
As a result, audio data is not assigned to channels 7 and 8, and channels 7 and 8 are not used.

Further, the DRAM 304 is provided with a volume level setting area in which the volume level is set (stored).
In the volume level setting area, any value from "0" to "6" is set as the volume level.
That is, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, a predetermined initial value (“3” in the present embodiment) is set in the volume level setting area by a predetermined initial setting process (not shown).
Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to change the volume level set in the volume level setting area by operating the volume adjustment button while the game is possible.
That is, as described above, the volume adjustment button has two operation units (first operation unit and second operation unit) that can be pressed by the player, and volume adjustment that detects the pressing operation of each operation unit. The switch 28 and the like are included in the configuration. Then, the volume adjustment switch 28 outputs the first detection signal to the effect control board 300 each time the first operation unit is pressed, and each time the second operation unit is pressed, the volume adjustment switch 28 outputs the first detection signal. The second detection signal is output to the effect control board 300.
Further, the CPU 310 sets the value (volume level) set in the volume level setting area up to "6" each time the first detection signal is input from the volume adjustment switch 28 during the game-enabled state. "1" is added, and each time the second detection signal is input from the volume adjustment switch 28, "1" is added from the value (volume level) set in the volume level setting area with "0" as the lower limit. Subtract.
Here, in the present embodiment, the volume adjustment image is displayed in the predetermined area of the display screen 31a in response to the detection signals (first detection signal and second detection signal) being input from the volume adjustment switch 28. Is started. The volume adjustment image is an image showing the current volume level. Specifically, in the volume adjustment image, by displaying a meter having a 7-step scale, it is shown that the volume level can be adjusted to 7 steps, and among the 7-step scales, The current volume level is indicated by pointing to the scale corresponding to the volume level set in the volume level setting area. The display of the volume adjustment image is terminated according to the lapse of a predetermined time from the input of the detection signal (first detection signal / second detection signal) from the volume adjustment switch 28.

Further, a volume changeover switch is connected to the sound circuit 323 via a sound circuit interface (not shown).
The volume changeover switch is composed of a rotary switch. Specifically, the volume changeover switch can turn on any of 10 [pieces] of contacts (contacts 0 to 9) by rotating the operation unit. Then, the volume changeover switch outputs a detection signal corresponding to the contact turned on to the sound circuit 323.

Further, the control ROM 302 stores a volume value setting table.
As shown in FIG. 58, in the volume value setting table, the volume level (“0” to “6”) set in the volume level setting area and the contact (contact) turned on in the voice changeover switch are displayed. The relationship between the combination of 0 to contact 9) and the volume value is registered.
When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 310 sets a predetermined initial value (“3” in the present embodiment) in the volume level setting area, and then performs a volume value initial setting process (not shown). Run.
In the volume value initial setting process, first, the volume level set in the volume level setting area is acquired. Further, based on the detection signal input from the volume changeover switch to the sound circuit 323, among the contacts 0 to 9 of the volume changeover switch, the contact that is in the ON state is determined. Further, referring to the volume value setting table, the acquired volume level and the volume value corresponding to the determined combination of the turned-on contacts are acquired. Then, the acquired volume value is set in each variable volume value setting area (each of the variable volume value setting area 1 to the variable volume value setting area 6). Further, in the specific volume value setting area, a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, the maximum value = "255") is set. Further, among the volume value setting areas included in the channel router setting register, each other volume value excluding the variable volume value setting area (variable volume value setting area 1 to variable volume value setting area 6) and the specific volume value setting area. Set "0" in the setting area.
As a result, all variable volume values are set according to the combination of the volume level set in the volume level setting area and the contact that is turned on among the contacts 0 to 9 that constitute the volume changeover switch. Volume values are set collectively in the area.
Therefore, the sound output from the upper left speaker (audio bus) is based on the volume level set in the volume level setting area and the contact that is turned on among the contacts 0 to 9 that constitute the volume changeover switch. The volume of the audio (audio based on the audio data transmitted from 1 to channel 1) and the volume of the audio output from the upper right speaker (audio based on the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 2 to channel 2). The volume of the audio output from the left middle speaker (audio based on the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 3 to the channel 3) and the audio output from the right middle speaker (transmitted from the audio bus 4 to the channel 4). Of the volume of the audio output from the lower speaker (audio based on the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 5 to the channel 5) and the volume of the audio output from the woofer. , The volume of the sound based on the sound data transmitted from the audio bus 6 to the channel 6 is set collectively.
On the other hand, regardless of the volume level set in the volume level setting area and the contacts that are turned on among the contacts 0 to 9 that constitute the volume changeover switch, the audio output from the woofer is audio. A predetermined value (in the present embodiment, the maximum value = "255") is set for the volume of the voice based on the voice data transmitted from the bus 7 to the channel 7.

Further, the CPU 310 executes a volume value change process (not shown) every time a detection signal (first detection signal / second detection signal) is input from the volume adjustment switch 28.
In the volume value change process, first, when the detection signal input from the volume adjustment switch 28 is the first detection signal, the value (volume level) set in the volume level setting area is set to the upper limit of "6". Add "1". On the other hand, when the detection signal input from the volume adjustment switch 28 is the second detection signal, "1" is subtracted from the value (volume level) set in the volume level setting area with "0" as the lower limit. .. Next, the volume level set in the volume level setting area is acquired. Further, based on the detection signal input from the volume changeover switch to the sound circuit 323, among the contacts 0 to 9 of the volume changeover switch, the contact that is in the ON state is determined. Further, referring to the volume value setting table, the acquired volume level and the volume value corresponding to the determined combination of the turned-on contacts are acquired. Then, the acquired volume value is set in each variable volume value setting area (each of the variable volume value setting area 1 to the variable volume value setting area 6).
As a result, all variable volume values are set according to the combination of the volume level set in the volume level setting area and the contact that is turned on among the contacts 0 to 9 that constitute the volume changeover switch. In the area, the volume value is changed at once.
Therefore, according to the operation of the volume adjustment button by the player, the volume of the sound output from the upper left speaker (the sound based on the voice data transmitted from the audio bus 1 to the channel 1) and the volume output from the upper right speaker. The volume of audio (audio based on audio data transmitted from audio bus 2 to channel 2) and audio output from the left middle speaker (audio based on audio data transmitted from audio bus 3 to channel 3). ), The volume of the audio output from the middle right speaker (audio based on the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 4 to the channel 4), and the audio output from the lower speaker (audio bus 5 to channel 5). The volume of the audio based on the audio data transmitted to the woofer and the volume of the audio output from the woofer based on the audio data transmitted from the audio bus 6 to the channel 6 are collectively combined. Be changed.
The value set in the specific volume value setting area is not changed according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. That is, among the voices output from the woofer, the volume of the voices based on the voice data transmitted from the audio bus 7 to the channel 6 is not changed according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit.

For example, as shown in FIG. 58, in a state where the contact 9 of the contacts 0 to 9 of the volume changeover switch is turned on, the volume level setting area is set according to the operation of the volume adjustment button by the player. When the volume level is set to "6", "255" is acquired as the volume value.
Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the acquired volume value = "255" is set in each of the variable volume value setting area 1 to the variable volume value setting area 6. At this time, the value set in the specific volume value setting area is fixed at a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, the maximum value = "255").
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58, in a state where the contact 9 of the contacts 0 to 9 of the volume changeover switch is turned on, the volume level setting area is set according to the operation of the volume adjustment button by the player. When the volume level is set to "5", "215" is acquired as the volume value.
Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the acquired volume value = "215" is set in each of the variable volume value setting area 1 to the variable volume value setting area 6. At this time, the value set in the specific volume value setting area is fixed at a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, the maximum value = "255").

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio buses 1 to 6 can be adjusted according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit.
On the other hand, for the audio data assigned to the audio bus 7, the volume is fixed at a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, the maximum value = "255"), and the volume is adjusted according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. Becomes impossible.
As a result, among the sounds (sound effects) output from the woofer, for the sounds for which the volume adjustment is permitted, the sound data of the sounds can be assigned to the audio bus 6 so that the player can adjust the volume. Can be done.
On the other hand, among the sound effects by the sound output from the woofer (sound effect), for the sound whose volume adjustment is prohibited, the volume adjustment by the player is impossible by allocating the sound data of the sound to the audio bus 7. Can be.

(About ventilation production)
Next, the sending effect executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute a ventilation effect as a kind of sound effect.
The "blower effect" is an effect of releasing (blowing) the air flow generated by the vibration of the diaphragm of the speaker 22 (specifically, the woofer) to the player.
That is, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a guidance mechanism (not shown) that guides the flow of air generated by the vibration of the diaphragm of the woofer. The guidance mechanism is configured to discharge the air flow generated by the vibration of the diaphragm of the woofer from the opening provided below the launch handle unit 6 toward the launch handle unit 6. As a result, it is possible to perform a blowing effect in which the air flow generated by the vibration of the diaphragm of the woofer is discharged toward the hand of the player who operates the handle operating portion of the firing handle unit 6.
Here, regarding the ventilation effect, when the volume is lowered by the operation of the volume adjustment button by the player, the air flow generated by the vibration of the diaphragm of the woofer is weakened, and as a result, the player may feel the wind. There is a risk that it will not be possible and the purpose of the production will not be achieved.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the audio data of the ventilation effect (the audio data for the woofer among the audio data constituting the ventilation effect) is assigned to the audio bus 7.
As a result, it becomes impossible to adjust the volume of the audio data of the ventilation effect according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit, and it is always output at a predetermined value (maximum value = "255" in this embodiment). Will be done.
Therefore, regarding the ventilation effect, it is possible to prevent the air flow generated by the vibration of the diaphragm of the woofer from being weakened, and to prevent the player from being unable to feel the wind.
In the present embodiment, the ventilation effect is composed only of specific audio data (specific compressed audio data). Here, the specific audio data is audio data dedicated to the ventilation effect. That is, in the command list that specifies the start of the ventilation effect, the reproduction of only the specific audio data (specific compressed audio data) is specified. In particular, in the command list that specifies the start of the ventilation effect, the panpot ratio is defined so that the specific audio data is assigned (output) to the audio bus 7.
As a result, when the ventilation effect is executed, the specific voice data is assigned to the audio bus 7, and the voice based on the specific voice data is a predetermined value (in the present embodiment, the maximum value = "255"). And it is output from the woofer. Then, along with the output of the sound based on the specific sound data by the woofer, the air flow generated by the vibration of the diaphragm of the woofer is released to the player.

On the other hand, for the other sound effects other than the ventilation effect, the audio data for the woofer is assigned to the audio bus 6 among the audio data constituting the sound effect.
For example, in the command list (command list A, B) that specifies the start of the sound effects A and B, among the sound data constituting the sound effects A and B, the sound data D and H for the woofer are the audio bus. The panpot ratio is specified so that it is assigned (output) to 6.
As a result, when other sound effects other than the ventilation effect are executed, the audio data for the woofer is assigned to the audio bus 6, and the sound based on the audio data is operated by each volume adjustment operation unit. The volume is adjusted according to the output from the woofer.

(Method of controlling the effect by the effect control board 300)
Next, a method of controlling the effect by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 selects an effect (effect number) to be executed according to a control command received from the main control board 200. Then, the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected effect number and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area of the DRAM 304.
The "production scenario data" is information that defines the progress of the production. Specifically, a plurality of process data are registered in the production scenario data in chronological order. That is, a plurality of process data and information for designating the start time (start timing) of the process based on each process data are registered in the effect scenario data.
Each process data contains one or more command information. For example, as command information, command information for designating the start of a sub-effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect), sub-effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect). Command information (hereinafter referred to as "directive end command") that specifies the end of is specified.

Further, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the effect based on the effect scenario data set in the effect scenario setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 updates the effect scenario timer set in the effect scenario setting area at a predetermined cycle, and the effect set in the effect scenario setting area based on the updated value of the effect scenario timer. In the process data registered in the scenario data, it is determined whether or not the process data whose start time has come exists. Then, when it is determined that the process data whose start time has arrived exists, each command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, the command information related to the display effect (command information for designating the start of the display effect, command information for designating the end of the display effect, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area. On the other hand, the command information related to the sound effect (command information for designating various sound effect control numbers) is stored in the sound command buffer area. On the other hand, the command information related to the lamp effect (command information for designating the start of the lamp effect, command information for designating the end of the lamp effect, etc.) is stored in the lamp command buffer area. On the other hand, command information related to the movable body effect (command information for designating the start of the movable body effect, command information for designating the end of the movable body effect, etc.) is stored in the movable body command buffer area.

(Control method of display effect)
Next, a method of controlling the display effect (display) by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The control ROM 302 stores an animation table corresponding to each display effect (each display effect number). Then, the animation table corresponding to each display effect is associated with the display priority information corresponding to the display effect (the image constituting the display effect).
The "display priority information" is information that specifies the display priority.
The "display priority" is information that specifies the priority of display (drawing).
When a plurality of display effects (displays) are executed in a timely manner, the display screen 31a is displayed (displayed on the display screen 31a) based on the plurality of display effects (images related to the plurality of display effects). Production image) is composed. In this case, among the plurality of display effects (plural images) constituting the display (the effect image), the display effect (image) having the higher display priority is relative to the display effect (image) having the lower display priority. , Is displayed with priority. That is, with respect to the plurality of display effects (the plurality of images) constituting the effect image, the display effect (image) having the higher display priority is displayed with priority.

In other words, of the plurality of display effects (plural images) constituting the effect image, the display effect (image) having the higher display priority is on the front side (player) of the display effect (image) having the lower display priority. Displayed on the side). That is, with respect to the plurality of display effects (the plurality of images) constituting the effect image, the display effect (image) having the higher display priority is displayed on the front side.
As a result, among the plurality of display effects (plural images) constituting the effect image, a portion overlapping the display effect (image) having a higher display priority and the display effect (image) having a lower display priority If it exists, the display effect (image) having the higher display priority is preferentially displayed for the overlapping portion.

The CPU 310 (display control unit) determines whether or not the command information is stored in the display command buffer area at a predetermined cycle. Then, when it is determined that the command information is stored in the display command buffer area, each command information stored in the display command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the command information for specifying the start of the display effect is stored in the display command buffer area, the animation table corresponding to the display effect number specified by the command information among the animation tables stored in the control ROM 302. Is read. Then, the read animation table is set (stored / registered) in the animation table setting area of the DRAM 304.
As a result, the animation table stored in the control ROM 302 is duplicated in the animation table setting area. It is possible to set a plurality of animation tables in the animation table setting area.

The "animation table" is information (various parameters for controlling the display of images) that defines the progress of the display effect (display of the effect image) by the various image display devices 31 and 32. In other words, the animation table is information that defines the movement of the image.
Specifically, a predetermined number of frame information is registered in the animation table in chronological order. Then, with respect to the predetermined number of frame information registered in the animation table, the display effect progresses by sequentially executing the display of the images based on the frame information according to the registered order.
Each frame information is various parameters for controlling (execution / configuration) the display of an image for one frame. That is, each frame information includes information (image address information) that specifies image data (compressed image data) used for drawing, information that specifies the display priority of the image data (display effect) (display priority information), and the image. Information that specifies the magnification (magnification / reduction ratio) when drawing data (hereinafter referred to as "display magnification information"), information that specifies the coordinates for drawing the image data (coordinates in the frame buffer area) (hereinafter, "display magnification information") It is configured to include information (hereinafter referred to as "display coordinate information"), information for specifying the transparency (transparency, transparency, transparency) at the time of drawing the image data (hereinafter referred to as "transparency information"), and the like. ..

Then, the CPU 310 controls the display of the effect image corresponding to each frame based on one or a plurality of animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes a command construction process described later at a predetermined cycle.
In the command construction process, first, the sub-scenario timer corresponding to each animation data set in the display scenario setting area is updated. Next, the display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area designated in the construction area based on all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area.

Specifically, for all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, among the frame information registered in each animation table, the frame information selected as the target for constructing the display list is acquired. Then, a display list is constructed based on all the acquired frame information.
As a result, the VDP is controlled according to the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area, and the display effect (display of the effect image by the main image display device 31) is controlled.
That is, when one animation data is set in the display scenario setting area, a display list for designating the drawing of the image data specified by the one animation data is constructed.
On the other hand, when a plurality of animation data are set in the display scenario setting area, it is specified that the drawing of the image data specified by the plurality of animation data is executed in a predetermined order (order). The display list is built.
At this time, based on the display priority specified by the display priority information set in the display scenario setting area, the order in which the drawing of the image data corresponding to the display priority information is executed is set.

(Control method of sound production)
Next, a method of controlling the sound effect by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 (sound control unit) determines whether or not the command information is stored in the sound command buffer area at a predetermined cycle. Then, when it is determined that the command information is stored in the sound command buffer area, each command information stored in the sound command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
Specifically, the command list corresponding to the sound effect control number specified by the command information is read from the control ROM 302, and the read command list is set in the control register of the sound circuit 323. As a result, the sound circuit 323 operates according to the command list set in the control register.

(Lamp production control method)
Next, a method of controlling the lamp effect by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 determines whether or not the command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area at a predetermined cycle. Then, when it is determined that the command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area, each command information stored in the lamp command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the command information for designating the start of the lamp effect is stored in the lamp command buffer area, the compressed lamp drive data corresponding to the lamp effect number specified by the command information is read, and the read compressed lamp drive data is read. Is set in the lamp register. As a result, the lamp controller 317a controls the lamp effect (driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20 and 21) according to the compressed lamp driving data set in the lamp register.

(Control method for moving body production)
Next, a method of controlling the effect of the movable body by the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 determines whether or not the command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area at a predetermined cycle. Then, when it is determined that the command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area, each command information stored in the movable body command buffer area is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
At this time, when the command information for designating the start of the movable body effect is stored in the movable body command buffer area, the compression motor drive data specified by the command information is read out, and the read compression motor drive data is used as the motor register. Set to. As a result, the motor controller 317b controls the movable body effect (driving of various motors 23 (various movable bodies)) according to the compression motor drive data set in the motor register.

(Configuration of driver board 330)
The driver board 330 includes a parallel serial conversion circuit 331, a lamp driver 332, and a motor driver 333.
The lamp driver 332 controls the drive (light emission) of the light emitting element group of each system constituting the board surface lamp 21 according to the lamp drive data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, in the lamp drive data, the brightness values corresponding to each system constituting the board lamp 21 are specified. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the brightness value specified in the lamp drive data is supplied to each system constituting the board lamp 21. As a result, the drive (light emission) of the light emitting element group constituting the system is controlled for each system.
The motor driver 333 is an excitation signal (drive current) for various motors 23 (motors 23 constituting various movable body units) arranged in the game board unit 10 according to the motor drive data input from the motor controller 317b. Control the output of.
At this time, in the motor drive data, the output value of each motor 23 arranged in the game board unit 10 is specified. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the output value specified in the motor drive data is supplied to each motor 23. As a result, the drive is controlled for each motor 23.
Detection signals from various sensors 24 are input to the parallel serial conversion circuit 331. Then, the parallel serial conversion circuit 331 converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 into serial data and outputs the detection signals to the serial communication controller 317.

(Structure of sub-connection board 340)
The sub-connection board 340 includes a parallel serial conversion circuit 341, a lamp driver 342, and a motor driver 343.
The lamp driver 342 controls the drive (light emission) of the light emitting element group of each system constituting the frame lamp 20 according to the lamp drive data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, in the lamp drive data, the brightness values corresponding to each system constituting the frame lamp 20 are specified. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the brightness value specified in the lamp drive data is supplied to each system constituting the frame lamp 20. As a result, the drive (light emission) of the light emitting element group constituting the system is controlled for each system.
The motor driver 343 is an excitation signal (drive current) for various motors 23 (motors 23 constituting various movable body units) arranged in the integrated door unit 4 according to the motor drive data input from the motor controller 317b. Control the output of.
At this time, in the motor drive data, the output value of each motor 23 arranged in the integrated door unit 4 is specified. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the output value specified in the motor drive data is supplied to each motor 23. As a result, the drive is controlled for each motor 23.
The detection signals from the various sensors 24 and the detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29 are input to the parallel serial conversion circuit 341. Then, the parallel serial conversion circuit 341 converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 and the detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29 into serial data and outputs the detection signals to the serial communication controller 317.

(Configuration of digital amplifier 305)
Next, the configuration of the digital amplifier 305 will be described.
The digital amplifier 305 converts and amplifies the audio data (digital signal) input from the sound circuit 323 into an analog signal, and converts it into various speakers 22 (upper left speaker, upper right speaker, left middle speaker, right middle speaker, and woofer). Output to. At this time, the digital amplifier 305 executes frequency correction, volume correction, and the like for each channel (channels 1 to 8).
In particular, the digital amplifier 305 has a built-in DSP (Digital Signal Processor). Then, the digital amplifier 305 transmits a frequency correction parameter from the CPU 310 to the digital amplifier 305, so that the PEQ (Parametric Equalizer) of 10 bands (frequency band) and 3 bands of each channel (channels 1 to 8) are transmitted. (Frequency band) DRC (Dynamic Range Controller), crossover filter, bass enhancement function, etc. can be set.

Specifically, the digital amplifier 305 is configured to include four CPU cores (cores 1 to 4). The core 1 executes frequency correction, volume correction, and the like on the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker). The core 2 executes frequency correction, volume correction, and the like on the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (left middle speaker, right middle speaker). The core 3 executes frequency correction, volume correction, and the like on the audio data of the channel 5 (woofer). The core 4 is unused.
Further, the digital amplifier 305 is provided with a frequency correction parameter setting register in which frequency correction parameters are set (stored). Then, the digital amplifier 305 executes frequency correction for the audio data of each channel (channel 1 to channel 8) according to the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting register.

In the present embodiment, the frequency correction parameter setting registers include the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1 corresponding to the core 1 (channels 1 and 2), the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2 corresponding to the core 2 (channels 3 and 4), and the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2. It is configured to include a frequency correction parameter setting unit 3 corresponding to the core 3 (channels 5 and 6).
Then, the core 1 executes frequency correction for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker) according to the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1. Further, the core 2 executes frequency correction for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (left middle speaker / right middle speaker) according to the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2. Further, the core 3 executes frequency correction on the audio data of the channel 5 (woofer) according to the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3.

(Control of digital amplifier 305 by CPU 310)
Next, the control of the digital amplifier 305 by the CPU 310 will be described.
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the types of frequency correction parameters.
The control ROM 302 stores frequency correction parameters.
The "frequency correction parameter" is information that specifies the content of the frequency correction executed by the digital amplifier 305.
As will be described later, the CPU 310 transmits the frequency correction parameter to the digital amplifier 305 via the serial communication controller 317. As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, the frequency correction parameter received from the CPU 310 is set in the frequency correction parameter setting register, and the frequency of the audio data of each channel is set according to the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting register. The correction is performed.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the present embodiment, there are four types of frequency correction parameters having different contents of frequency correction (specifically, "normal time / frequency correction parameter" and "big hit / frequency correction parameter". , "Time reduction / frequency correction parameters" and "Inspection / frequency correction parameters") are specified. Then, in the control ROM 302, "normal time / frequency correction parameter", "big hit time / frequency correction parameter", "time reduction time / frequency correction parameter" and "inspection time / frequency correction parameter" are stored.

The "normal time / frequency correction parameter" is a frequency correction parameter corresponding to the occurrence of the normal gaming state. That is, the "normal time / frequency correction parameter" is information that specifies the content of the frequency correction executed by the digital amplifier 305 during the occurrence of the normal gaming state.
The "normal game state" is a game state in which the jackpot game state has not occurred and the time saving control is stopped.
In particular, in the "normal time / frequency correction parameter", the content of frequency correction for each channel (each speaker) is specified (specified) according to the frequency characteristics of each speaker (so that the frequency characteristics of each speaker are utilized). ing.
The "normal time / frequency correction parameter" includes the "normal time / frequency correction parameter 1" corresponding to the core 1, the "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2" corresponding to the core 2, and the "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2" corresponding to the core 3. -Frequency correction parameter 3 "is included.

The "normal time / frequency correction parameter 1" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker) by the core 1. Specifically, the "normal time / frequency correction parameter 1" specifies the emphasis of the treble range and the midrange, and the removal (cut) of the bass range. As a result, when "normal time / frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, the treble and midrange are emphasized for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker). At the same time, the bass range is removed.
The "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (left middle speaker / right middle speaker) by the core 2. Specifically, the "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2" specifies the emphasis of the treble and midrange and the removal of the bass. As a result, when "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, the treble and midrange are emphasized for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (left middle speaker / right middle speaker). At the same time, the bass range is removed.
The "normal time / frequency correction parameter 3" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of the channel 5 (woofer) by the core 3. Specifically, the "normal time / frequency correction parameter 3" specifies the emphasis of the bass range and the removal of the treble range and the midrange. As a result, when the "normal time / frequency correction parameter 3" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3, the low range is emphasized and the high range and the middle range are removed from the audio data of the channel 5 (woofer). Will be done.

The "big hit / frequency correction parameter" is a frequency correction parameter corresponding to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. That is, the "big hit / frequency correction parameter" is information that specifies the content of the frequency correction executed by the digital amplifier 305 during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state.
In particular, in the "big hit / frequency correction parameter", the content of frequency correction for each channel (each speaker) is specified (specified) according to the frequency characteristics of each speaker (so that the frequency characteristics of each speaker are utilized). ing.
The "big hit / frequency correction parameter" includes the "big hit / frequency correction parameter 1" corresponding to the core 1, the "big hit / frequency correction parameter 2" corresponding to the core 2, and the "big hit / frequency correction parameter 2" corresponding to the core 3. -Frequency correction parameter 3 "is included.

The "big hit / frequency correction parameter 1" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker) by the core 1. Specifically, the "big hit / frequency correction parameter 1" specifies the emphasis of the treble and midrange and the removal of the bass. As a result, when the "big hit / frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, the treble and midrange are emphasized for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker). At the same time, the bass range is removed.
The "big hit / frequency correction parameter 2" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (left middle speaker / right middle speaker) by the core 2. Specifically, the "big hit / frequency correction parameter 2" specifies emphasis on the treble and midrange and removal of the bass. As a result, when the "big hit / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, the treble and midrange are emphasized for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (left middle speaker / right middle speaker). At the same time, the bass range is removed.
The "big hit / frequency correction parameter 3" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of the channel 5 (woofer) by the core 3. Specifically, the "big hit / frequency correction parameter 3" specifies the emphasis of the bass range and the removal of the treble range and the midrange. As a result, when the "big hit / frequency correction parameter 3" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3, the low range is emphasized and the high range and the middle range are removed from the audio data of the channel 5 (woofer). Will be done.

The "time reduction time / frequency correction parameter" is a frequency correction parameter corresponding to the time reduction control being executed. That is, the "time reduction time / frequency correction parameter" is information that specifies the content of the frequency correction executed by the digital amplifier 305 during the execution of the time reduction control.
In particular, in the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter", the content of frequency correction for each channel (each speaker) is specified (specified) according to the frequency characteristics of each speaker (so that the frequency characteristics of each speaker are utilized). ing.
The "time reduction / frequency correction parameter" includes the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 1" corresponding to the core 1, the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 2" corresponding to the core 2, and the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 2" corresponding to the core 3. -Frequency correction parameter 3 "is included.

The "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 1" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker) by the core 1. Specifically, the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 1" specifies the emphasis of the treble and midrange and the removal of the bass. As a result, when the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, the treble and midrange are emphasized for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker). At the same time, the bass range is removed.
The "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 2" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (left middle speaker / right middle speaker) by the core 2. Specifically, the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 2" specifies the emphasis of the treble and midrange and the removal of the bass. As a result, when the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, the treble and midrange are emphasized for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (left middle speaker / right middle speaker). At the same time, the bass range is removed.
The "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 3" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of the channel 5 (woofer) by the core 3. Specifically, the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 3" specifies the emphasis of the bass range and the removal of the treble range and the midrange. As a result, when the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 3" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3, the low range is emphasized and the high range and the middle range are removed from the audio data of the channel 5 (woofer). Will be done.

The “inspection / frequency correction parameter” is a frequency correction parameter corresponding to the operation confirmation process described later during execution. That is, the "inspection / frequency correction parameter" is information that specifies the content of the frequency correction executed by the digital amplifier 305 during the execution of the operation confirmation process.
In particular, in the "normal time / frequency correction parameter", the content of the frequency correction of each channel (each speaker) is specified (specified) regardless of the frequency characteristics of each speaker. In the present embodiment, the "inspection / frequency correction parameter" is information that specifies that frequency correction is not executed for all channels (all speakers).
"Inspection / frequency correction parameter" includes "inspection / frequency correction parameter 1" corresponding to core 1, "inspection / frequency correction parameter 2" corresponding to core 2, and "inspection / frequency correction parameter 2" corresponding to core 3. -Frequency correction parameter 3 "is included.

The "inspection / frequency correction parameter 1" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker) by the core 1. Specifically, "inspection / frequency correction parameter 1" specifies that correction is not performed (no correction) for all frequency bands. As a result, when "inspection / frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, frequency correction is not executed for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker).
The “inspection / frequency correction parameter 2” is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (left middle speaker / right middle speaker) by the core 2. Specifically, "inspection / frequency correction parameter 2" specifies that correction is not performed (no correction) for all frequency bands. As a result, when the "inspection / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, the frequency correction is not executed for the audio data of the channels 3 and 4 (left middle speaker / right middle speaker).
The “inspection / frequency correction parameter 3” is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of the channel 5 (woofer) by the core 3. Specifically, "inspection / frequency correction parameter 3" specifies that correction is not performed (no correction) for all frequency bands. As a result, when the "inspection / frequency correction parameter 3" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3, the frequency correction is not executed for the audio data of the channel 5 (woofer).

The DRAM 304 is provided with a frequency correction parameter number setting area 1, a frequency correction parameter number setting area 2, and a frequency correction parameter number setting area 3.
In the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1, information for designating the type of the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1 (hereinafter, referred to as “frequency correction parameter number”) is set (stored).
In the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2, information (frequency correction parameter number) for designating the type of the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2 is set (stored).
In the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3, information (frequency correction parameter number) for designating the type of the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3 is set (stored).
In the present embodiment, as the frequency correction parameter number, a value for specifying the "normal time / frequency correction parameter" (specifically, "0") and a value for specifying the "big hit / frequency correction parameter" (specifically). Is a value that specifies "1"), a value that specifies "time reduction / frequency correction parameter" (specifically, "2"), and a value that specifies "inspection / frequency correction parameter" (specifically). , "3") and are specified.
Then, any value of "0" to "3" is set in each frequency correction parameter number setting area (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter number setting area 3).

Further, the control ROM 302 stores a post-effector frequency correction parameter.
The "post-effector frequency correction parameter" is information that specifies the content of the frequency correction executed by the post-effector 360.
In the present embodiment, there are two types of post-effector frequency correction parameters having different frequency correction contents (specifically, "normal time / post-effector frequency correction parameter" and "inspection / post-effector frequency correction parameter". ) Is specified. Then, in the control ROM 302, the "normal time / post-effector frequency correction parameter" and the "inspection / post-effector frequency correction parameter" are stored.

The "normal / post-effector frequency correction parameter" is a post-effector frequency correction parameter corresponding to the game. That is, the "normal time / post-effector frequency correction parameter" is information that specifies the content of the frequency correction executed by the post-effector 360 during the game. In particular, the "normal / post-effector frequency correction parameter" specifies that a predetermined frequency correction is performed for the audio data of each channel (channels 1 to 8).
The “inspection / post-effector frequency correction parameter” is a post-effector frequency correction parameter corresponding to the execution of the operation confirmation process described later. That is, the "inspection / post-effector frequency correction parameter" is information that specifies the content of the frequency correction executed by the post-effector 360 during the execution of the operation confirmation process. In particular, the "inspection / post-effector frequency correction parameter" specifies that frequency correction is not executed for the audio data of all channels (channels 1 to 8).

The sound circuit 323 is provided with a post-effector frequency correction parameter number register in which a post-effector frequency correction number is set. In the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register, specify a value (specifically, "0") that specifies "normal / post-effector frequency correction parameter" and "inspection / post-effector frequency correction parameter". One of the values (specifically, "1") is set.
Then, the post-effector 360 executes frequency correction with reference to the post-effector frequency correction parameter stored in the control ROM 302 according to the value set in the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register.
Specifically, when "0" is set in the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register, the post-effector 360 performs frequency correction according to the "normal / post-effector frequency correction parameter" stored in the control ROM 302. Run. On the other hand, when "1" is set in the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register, frequency correction is executed according to the "inspection / post-effector frequency correction parameter" stored in the control ROM 302.

(Setting of frequency correction parameters during the game)
When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 310 sets each frequency correction parameter number (frequency correction parameter number setting) of the DRAM 304 in the initial setting process (step S28-1) included in the sub CPU initialization process described later. Initialize the values in area 1 to frequency correction parameter number setting area 3). As a result, in each frequency correction parameter number setting area, a value (specifically, “0”) that specifies the “normal time / frequency correction parameter” is set.
Further, the CPU 310 initializes the value of the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register of the sound circuit 323 in the initial setting process (step S28-1). As a result, a value (specifically, “0”) that specifies the “normal / post-effector frequency correction parameter” is set in the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register.
As a result, after that, in the post-effector 360, frequency correction is executed for the audio data of each channel according to the "normal time / post-effector frequency correction parameter".

Further, in the digital amplifier setting process (step S28-3), the CPU 310 transmits a reset signal to the digital amplifier 305, and then "normal time / frequency correction parameters"("normal time / frequency correction parameters 1" to ". Normal time ・ Frequency correction parameter 3 ”) is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, various registers (frequency correction parameter setting register (frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, frequency correction parameter setting unit 3), volume setting (correction) register, After the terminal setting registers, status information setting registers, etc.) are initialized (cleared), the "normal / frequency correction parameters" are set in the frequency correction parameter setting register. That is, "normal time / frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3. Normal time / frequency correction parameter 3 ”is set.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, frequency correction is executed for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker) according to "normal time / frequency correction parameter 1", and "normal time / frequency correction parameter" is executed. According to "2", frequency correction is performed for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (middle left speaker and middle right speaker), and according to "normal time / frequency correction parameter 3", the frequency for the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) is corrected. The correction is performed.

Further, the CPU 310 specifies the "big hit / frequency correction parameter" in each frequency correction parameter number setting area (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter setting area 3) of the DRAM 304 at the start of the big hit game state. A value (specifically, "1") is set.
Further, the CPU 310 transmits "big hit / frequency correction parameters"("big hit / frequency correction parameters 1" to "big hit / frequency correction parameters 3") to the digital amplifier 305.
As a result, the "big hit / frequency correction parameter" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting register of the digital amplifier 305. That is, "big hit / frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, "big hit / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and "big hit / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3. At the time of big hit, frequency correction parameter 3 ”is set.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, frequency correction is executed for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker) according to "big hit / frequency correction parameter 1", and "big hit / frequency correction parameter" is executed. According to "2", frequency correction is performed for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (middle left speaker and middle right speaker), and according to "big hit / frequency correction parameter 3", the frequency for the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) is corrected. The correction is performed.

Further, when the CPU 310 does not start the time saving control according to the end of the big hit game state, each frequency correction parameter number setting area (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter setting area 1 to the frequency correction parameter setting area of the DRAM 304 is performed at the end of the big hit game state. In 3), a value (specifically, "0") for specifying the "normal time / frequency correction parameter" is set.
Further, the CPU 310 transmits the "normal time / frequency correction parameter"("normal time / frequency correction parameter 1" to "normal time / frequency correction parameter 3") to the digital amplifier 305.
As a result, the "normal time / frequency correction parameter" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting register of the digital amplifier 305. That is, "normal time / frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3. Normal time / frequency correction parameter 3 ”is set.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, frequency correction is executed for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker) according to "normal time / frequency correction parameter 1", and "normal time / frequency correction parameter" is executed. According to "2", frequency correction is performed for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (middle left speaker and middle right speaker), and according to "normal time / frequency correction parameter 3", the frequency for the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) is corrected. The correction is performed.

On the other hand, when the CPU 310 starts the time saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state, each frequency correction parameter number setting area (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter setting area 1) of the DRAM 304 is started at the end of the big hit game state. In 3), a value (specifically, "2") for specifying the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter" is set.
Further, the CPU 310 transmits the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter"("time reduction / frequency correction parameter 1" to "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 3") to the digital amplifier 305.
As a result, the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting register of the digital amplifier 305. That is, "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3. Time saving / frequency correction parameter 3 ”is set.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, frequency correction is executed for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker) according to "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 1", and "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 1" is executed. According to "2", frequency correction is performed for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (middle left speaker and middle right speaker), and according to "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 3", the frequency for the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) is corrected. The correction is performed.

Further, at the end of the time reduction control (when the time reduction number of times is exhausted), the CPU 310 sets the frequency correction parameter number setting area (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter setting area 3) of the DRAM 304 to "normal time. Set a value (specifically, "0") that specifies the "frequency correction parameter".
Further, the CPU 310 transmits the "normal time / frequency correction parameter"("normal time / frequency correction parameter 1" to "normal time / frequency correction parameter 3") to the digital amplifier 305.
As a result, the "normal time / frequency correction parameter" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting register of the digital amplifier 305. That is, "normal time / frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3. Normal time / frequency correction parameter 3 ”is set.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, frequency correction is executed for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker) according to "normal time / frequency correction parameter 1", and "normal time / frequency correction parameter" is executed. According to "2", frequency correction is performed for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (middle left speaker and middle right speaker), and according to "normal time / frequency correction parameter 3", the frequency for the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) is corrected. The correction is performed.

As described above, during the occurrence of the normal gaming state, the post-effector 360 executes frequency correction of the audio data of each channel (channels 1 to 8) based on the "normal time / post-effector frequency correction parameters". At the same time, the digital amplifier 305 executes frequency correction of the audio data of each channel (channels 1 to 8) based on the "normal time / frequency correction parameter".
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, the post-effector 360 executes frequency correction of the audio data of each channel (channels 1 to 8) based on the "normal / post-effector frequency correction parameters". , The digital amplifier 305 executes frequency correction of the audio data of each channel (channels 1 to 8) based on the "big hit / frequency correction parameter".
On the other hand, during the execution of the time reduction control, the post-effector 360 executes frequency correction of the audio data of each channel (channels 1 to 8) based on the "normal time / post-effector frequency correction parameter", and also performs frequency correction. The digital amplifier 305 executes frequency correction of the audio data of each channel (channels 1 to 8) based on the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter".
In particular, in the "normal time / frequency correction parameter", "big hit time / frequency correction parameter", and "time reduction time / frequency correction parameter", for each channel, audio data matching the frequency characteristics of the speaker connected to the channel is obtained. The content of the frequency correction is specified so that it can be generated. As a result, the characteristics of each speaker can be brought out, and the effect of sound production can be improved.

Here, in the digital amplifier 305, when the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting register (frequency correction parameter setting unit 1 to frequency correction parameter setting unit 3) is changed, the volume of the corresponding channel is changed to " After being corrected to "0" (mute / silent), the frequency correction parameter is changed.
Specifically, when the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1 is changed, the frequency correction parameter is changed after the volume is set to "0" for channels 1 and 2. Then, after changing the frequency correction parameter, the original volume of channels 1 and 2 is restored.
On the other hand, when the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2 is changed, the frequency correction parameter is changed after the volume is set to "0" for the channels 3 and 4. Then, after changing the frequency correction parameter, the original volume is restored for channels 3 and 4.
On the other hand, when the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3 is changed, the frequency correction parameter is changed after the volume is set to "0" for channels 5 and 6. Then, after changing the frequency correction parameter, the original volume is restored for channels 5 and 6.

(Setting of frequency correction parameters when executing operation check processing)
The main control board 200 is provided with an inspection terminal (not shown) to which an inspection device can be connected. Then, by operating the inspection device connected to the inspection terminal, it is possible to transmit a predetermined inspection command from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300.
Upon receiving the predetermined inspection command, the CPU 310 executes the speaker inspection process.
In the speaker inspection process, first, in each frequency correction parameter number setting area (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter setting area 3) of the DRAM 304, a value for designating the "inspection / frequency correction parameter" (specifically). Sets "3").
Further, in the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register of the sound circuit 323, a value (specifically, “1”) for specifying the “inspection / post-effector frequency correction parameter” is set.
As a result, after that, in the post-effector 360, frequency correction is executed for the audio data of each channel according to the “inspection / post-effector frequency correction parameter”.

Further, the "inspection / frequency correction parameter"("inspection / frequency correction parameter 1" to "inspection / frequency correction parameter 3") is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305.
As a result, the "inspection / frequency correction parameter" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting register of the digital amplifier 305. That is, "inspection / frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, "inspection / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and "inspection / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3. At the time of inspection ・ Frequency correction parameter 3 ”is set.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, frequency correction is executed for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker) according to "inspection / frequency correction parameter 1", and "inspection / frequency correction parameter" is executed. According to "2", frequency correction is performed for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (middle left speaker and middle right speaker), and according to "inspection / frequency correction parameter 3", the frequency for the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) is corrected. The correction is performed.

In the speaker inspection process, the operation check process is then executed.
In the operation confirmation process, a predetermined inspection sound (sound effect, voice, etc.) is output from each speaker in a predetermined order for the upper left speaker, the upper right speaker, the left middle speaker, the right middle speaker, and the woofer. As a result, the inspector inspects (operation check) whether or not the speaker is operating normally based on the inspection sound output from each speaker.
In the present embodiment, the speaker inspection process (operation check process) is completed by shutting off the power supply of the pachinko machine 1.
Here, if the same frequency correction as during the game is executed for the inspection sound output from each speaker, the inspector may not be able to hear the inspection sound. For example, when the inspection sound in the frequency band from the treble range to the midrange is output from each speaker, the inspector executes frequency correction for removing the treble and midrange for the inspection sound output from the woofer. However, there is a risk that the inspection sound output from the woofer cannot be heard.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, while the operation confirmation process of the speaker 22 is being executed, the post-effector 360 outputs the audio data of each channel (channels 1 to 8) based on the “inspection / post-effector frequency correction parameter”. The frequency correction is controlled, and the digital amplifier 305 controls the frequency correction of the audio data of each channel (channels 1 to 8) based on the "inspection / frequency correction parameters".
In particular, the "inspection / post-effector frequency correction parameter" stipulates that the frequency correction of the audio data of each channel is not executed (the audio data is passed through). In addition, the content of the "inspection / frequency correction parameter" is defined so that the frequency correction of the audio data of each channel is not executed (the audio data is passed through).
As a result, during the execution of the operation confirmation process of the speaker 22, frequency correction is not executed for the audio data of all channels in the sound circuit 323 and the digital amplifier 305.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inspector from being unable to hear the inspection sound output from each speaker 22.

Here, each speaker may be damaged if a sound in a frequency band that does not match the frequency characteristics of the speaker is output at a loud volume.
Therefore, in the digital amplifier 305, during the period in which the frequency correction of the audio data of each channel is controlled based on the "inspection / frequency correction parameter", the "normal time / frequency correction parameter" and the "big hit / frequency correction" Even if the volume (gain) of each channel is suppressed (reduced) as compared with the period during which the frequency correction of the audio data of each channel is controlled based on the "parameter" or the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter". I do not care.
For example, in the speaker inspection process, the "inspection / volume correction parameter" is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305 together with the "inspection / frequency correction parameter", and the digital amplifier 305 sends the "inspection / volume correction parameter" to the digital amplifier 305 during the operation confirmation process. The volume of each channel may be controlled according to the "inspection / volume correction parameter". At this time, the "inspection / volume correction parameter" is being played for each channel ("normal time / frequency correction parameter", "big hit / frequency correction parameter" or "time reduction / frequency correction parameter" is being set). It is assumed that a lower volume is specified in comparison with.

(Digital amplifier reset process)
Next, the digital amplifier reset process will be described.
The digital amplifier 305 is provided with a status information setting register in which status information is set. Here, the "status information" is information indicating the state of the digital amplifier 305.
Further, the digital amplifier 305 can detect the occurrence of various abnormal states such as the occurrence of an overcurrent, the occurrence of a high temperature state, and the occurrence of a state in which the duty ratio (τ) is maintained at an abnormal level. There is. When various abnormal states are not detected, a value corresponding to the normal state (specifically, "0") is set in the status information setting register, and the status is set according to the detection of various abnormal states. In the information setting register, a value (specifically, "1") corresponding to the abnormal state is set.
Further, the CPU 310 acquires the status information set in the status information setting register of the digital amplifier 305 in the status information acquisition process (step S28-7) described later. Then, when it is determined that the acquired status information is a value corresponding to the abnormal state (specifically, "1"), the digital amplifier reset process (step S28-9) described later is executed.
In the digital amplifier reset process, a reset signal is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305 (the signal input to the reset terminal is turned on). Then, when the digital amplifier 305 receives the reset signal, it initializes various registers. Specifically, a frequency correction parameter setting register (frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and frequency correction parameter setting unit 3), a register related to volume setting (correction), a register related to terminal setting, Initialize (clear) the status information setting register, etc. As a result, a value (specifically, "0") corresponding to the normal state is set in the status information setting register.

Here, if a reset signal is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305 while the power is being turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the frequency correction parameter setting registers (frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and) By initializing the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3), the sound quality of the sound output from the speaker 22 changes before and after the reset signal is transmitted, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, after transmitting the reset signal to the digital amplifier 305, the frequency correction parameter setting register (frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and frequency correction parameter setting unit 3) is set. The set information is restored to the information before the reset signal is transmitted (before the occurrence of the abnormal state is detected in the digital amplifier 305).
That is, the CPU 310 executes the parameter return process (step S28-10) after executing the digital amplifier reset process.
In the parameter return processing, first, the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter number setting area 3) of the DRAM 304 is confirmed. Then, the frequency correction parameter corresponding to the value of each frequency correction parameter number setting area is read from the control ROM 302, and the read frequency correction parameter is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305.

Specifically, the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 is "0", the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 is "0", and the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 is "0". If there is, "normal time / frequency correction parameter 1", "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2", and "normal time / frequency correction parameter 3" are transmitted to the digital amplifier 305. As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, the "normal time / frequency correction parameter 1" is restored to the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, the "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2" is restored to the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and the frequency correction is performed. The "normal time / frequency correction parameter 3" is restored to the parameter setting unit 3.
On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 is "1", the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 is "1", and the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 is "1". , "Big hit / frequency correction parameter 1", "Big hit / frequency correction parameter 2" and "Big hit / frequency correction parameter 3" are transmitted to the digital amplifier 305. As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, the "big hit / frequency correction parameter 1" is restored to the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, the "big hit / frequency correction parameter 2" is restored to the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and the frequency correction is performed. The "big hit / frequency correction parameter 3" is restored to the parameter setting unit 3.
On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 is "2", the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 is "2", and the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 is "2". , "Time saving time / frequency correction parameter 1", "Time saving time / frequency correction parameter 2" and "Time saving time / frequency correction parameter 3" are transmitted to the digital amplifier 305. As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 1" is restored to the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, and the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 2" is restored to the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and the frequency correction is performed. The "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 3" is restored to the parameter setting unit 3.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the digital amplifier 305 is initialized (reset) while the power is turned on to the effect control board 300, the speaker 22 is before and after the digital amplifier 305 is initialized. The sound quality of the sound output from is not changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.
Here, if an abnormal state occurs in the digital amplifier 305 while the power is being turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the effect control board 300 is not initialized / restored as described above without being executed. Initialization / recovery processing (steps S28-9, S28-10) is executed only for the digital amplifier 305.
On the other hand, if an abnormal state occurs in the effect control board 300 while the power is being turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the effect control board 300 can be turned on again after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. , The initialization / recovery process (step S28-1) is executed, and the initialization / recovery process (step S28-3) is executed for the digital amplifier 305. As a result, various storages for controlling the effect on the effect control board 300 (frequency correction parameter number setting area value, set value storage area value, flag area value indicating the execution status of the time saving control, flag indicating the effect mode). The value of the area, etc.) will be initialized (the value before the occurrence of the abnormal state is deleted and the initial value is set again).

(About the state of the gaming machine)
In the pachinko machine 1, six states (specifically, a game-enabled state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormality state, a RAM abnormality state, and a backup abnormality state) are defined as game machine states. ..
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a gaming machine state flag area. In the gaming machine status flag area, as gaming machine status flags, six gaming machine states (specifically, a game available state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormality state, a RAM abnormality state, and a backup abnormality state) ), The value corresponding to any one of the gaming machine states is stored (set). Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a game machine state corresponding to the value stored in the game machine state flag area is generated.

The "gamable state" is a game machine state in which the game can proceed.
During the game-enabled state, the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18, which will be described later, are permitted to be executed. As a result, the game (normal game and special game) can be advanced.
In addition, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 during the game-enabled state. In addition, information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60.

The "setting change state" is a gaming machine state in which the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 can be changed.
The setting change state occurs when the setting change condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection signal is detected from the RAM clear switch 207. When the signal is input, the setting change condition is satisfied. That is, when the power is turned on, when the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, a setting change state occurs. Will be done.
While the setting change state is occurring, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the setting change state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. In addition, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Further, while the setting change state is occurring, the set value stored in the set value area can be changed by pressing the RAM clear switch 207. Then, if the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the game-enabled state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is fixed.

The "setting confirmation state" is a gaming machine state in which the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be confirmed.
The setting confirmation state is generated when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection signal is detected from the RAM clear switch 207. When no signal is input, the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed, a setting confirmation state occurs. Will be done.
While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the setting confirmation state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. This makes it possible to check the set value stored in the set value area. In addition, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
It should be noted that the set value stored in the set value area cannot be changed while the setting confirmation state is occurring.
Then, if the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the game-enabled state is generated instead of the setting confirmation state.

The "setting abnormality state" is a gaming machine state in which a setting abnormality has occurred.
The setting abnormal state occurs when it is determined that the set value set in the set value area is not within the specified range during the occurrence of the game-enabled state.
During the occurrence of the setting abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the setting abnormality state, the performance display device 206 displays an error code for designating the occurrence of the setting abnormality. In addition, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the abnormal setting state, it is necessary to shut off the power and turn on the power to cause the setting change state.

The "RAM abnormal state" is a gaming machine state in which a RAM abnormality has occurred.
The RAM abnormality state occurs when the occurrence of a read / write abnormality of the RAM 230 is determined at the time of turning on the power.
During the occurrence of the RAM abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the RAM abnormality state, the performance display device 206 displays an error code for designating the occurrence of the RAM abnormality. In addition, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the RAM abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power cutoff and power on to cause a setting change state.

The "backup error state" is a gaming machine state in which a backup error has occurred.
The backup abnormality state occurs when it is determined that a backup abnormality of the RAM 230 (specifically, an abnormality of the backup flag or an abnormality of the checksum) has occurred at the time of turning on the power.
During the occurrence of the backup abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the backup abnormality state, the performance display device 206 displays an error code specifying the occurrence of the backup abnormality. In addition, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to turn off the power and turn on the power to cause the setting change state.

(About set value)
Next, the set value (setting information) set by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "set value" is information that specifies the winning probability (probability of winning the jackpot game state) of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery). In the present embodiment, values of "0" to "5" are defined as set values.
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a set value area. In the set value area, any one of "0" to "5" is stored (set) as the set value. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to the probability corresponding to the value set in the set value area.
In the present embodiment, the winning probabilities of the special symbol lottery corresponding to each set value are, in order from the one with the highest winning probability, the winning probability corresponding to the set value = "5" and the winning probability corresponding to the set value = "4". , Setting value = Winning probability corresponding to "3", Setting value = Winning probability corresponding to "2", Setting value = Winning probability corresponding to "1", Setting value = Winning probability corresponding to "0" (Winning) Probability "high" → winning probability "low").

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the set value stored in the set value area while the setting change state is occurring. Here, the change of the set value is executed by the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc.).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated in the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed. A change state occurs.
During the occurrence of the setting change state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. Further, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the set value stored in the set value area is changed. At this time, if the set value set in the set value area is changed, the set value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
Then, if the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the game-enabled state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is fixed.

(About base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, the base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210 during the game-playable state. In the present embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only during the occurrence of a predetermined gaming state (specifically, during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state and during the stop of the time saving control).
Then, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 during the occurrence of the playable state.
The "base ratio" is the number of game balls fired in the game area 30 and a predetermined entry port (in this embodiment, the first start opening 51, the second start opening 52, and other winning openings 54 to 57). The information is calculated based on the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game balls. Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts to the number of out balls.
In the present embodiment, the base ratio in the predetermined section (period) is calculated for each predetermined section (period). Then, as a predetermined section, a section in which a predetermined number of out balls (60,000 [balls] in the present embodiment) is detected (discharged) is defined. That is, each section starts when the end of the previous section is reached, and ends when the number of out balls detected during the current section reaches a predetermined number (60,000 [balls]). Then, the CPU 210 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each section.

A predetermined time may be specified as a predetermined section. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
"Number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. The “out ball” refers to a game ball discharged from the game area 30. Specifically, the out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
The game ball discharged from the out port 58 may be used as an out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the out port 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be used as the out ball.
The “number of payouts” refers to the total number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and the other winning ports 54 to 57.

(About various lottery)
Next, various lottery executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate 41. Then, when the normal symbol lottery is won, a game state is generated per normal symbol. In the normal game state, the normal electric accessory 52a is displaced (opened) from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second starting port 52.
In the present embodiment, one type of "per game" is set as the type of the game state per game that occurs when the normal symbol lottery is won.

When the "normal symbol hit" is won (the ordinary symbol lottery is won), the normal symbol display device is controlled so that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at the "normal symbol per symbol".
On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is lost, the normal symbol display device is controlled so that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at the "missing symbol".
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute a time saving control as an auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During the execution of the time reduction control, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "variation time") is shortened as compared with the time when the time reduction control is stopped. In the present embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is improved and the time for displaying the variation of the normal symbol is shortened during the execution of the time reduction control as compared with the case where the time reduction control is stopped. Further, during the execution of the time reduction control, the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is increased and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is increased in the game state per normal figure as compared with the time reduction control is stopped. It will be extended.

When the "per-figure" is won, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 1 [times] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is 0.5. It is set to [s] or 2.0 [s]. At this time, during the execution of the time reduction control, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each time is set to 2.0 [s]. Set. On the other hand, while the time reduction control is stopped, the number of times the normal electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set to 0.5 [s] each time. Will be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 51, and the second special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. A special symbol lottery is executed. Then, when the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won, a big hit game state occurs. In the big hit game state, a round game in which the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state is executed, and the game ball can enter the big winning opening 53.
In the present embodiment, "big hit 1" and "big hit 2" are set as the types of big hit game states that occur when the first special symbol lottery is won, and they occur when the second special symbol lottery is won. As the type of the big hit game state, "big hit 3" to "big hit 6" are set.

When the "big hit 1" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 1 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "probability variation symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, as for the "probability variation symbol", for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the same, such as "7,7,7". The display mode is such that the second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, is aligned with the "number symbols" indicating an odd number and shows a predetermined color.
When the "big hit 2" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 2 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "normal symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, in the "normal symbol", for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the same, such as "2, 2, 2". The display mode is such that the second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, is aligned with the "number symbols" indicating an even number, and shows a predetermined color.
When the "big hit 3" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 3 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "probability variation symbol" is stopped and displayed.
When the "big hit 4" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 4 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "probability variation symbol" is stopped and displayed.
When the "big hit 5" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 5 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "latent symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, the "hidden symbol" is, for example, a predetermined first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, such as "1, 2, 3". The combination has regularity, and the second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, shows a predetermined color.
When the "big hit 6" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit 6 symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "latent symbol" is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery is lost (in the case of "missing"), the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device or the special figure 2 display device. .. Further, in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, as for the "outlier symbol", for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is stopped and displayed in at least one area such as "1, 6, 9". The number indicated by the displayed "number symbol" is a different combination from the number indicated by the "number symbol" stopped and displayed in another area, and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. Is a display mode showing a predetermined color.

When "Big hit 1" to "Big hit 6" are won, a predetermined number of round games are executed in the big hit game state.
In the present embodiment, when the "big hit 1", "big hit 2", "big hit 5" or "big hit 6" is won, the number of round games is set to 5 [times]. On the other hand, if the "big hit 3" is won, the number of round games is set to 15 [times]. On the other hand, when the "big hit 4" is won, the number of round games is set to 10 [times].
When "Big hit 1" to "Big hit 6" are won, the maximum opening time of the special electric accessory 53a in each round game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment). NS. Then, in each round game, the maximum opening time set after the special electric accessory 53a is opened and the number of game balls entering the large winning opening 53 in the round game are determined. It ends when one of the conditions of reaching the predetermined upper limit (10 [spheres] in the present embodiment) is satisfied.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the gaming states related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery) are "special symbol low probability state" and "special symbol high probability state". Is stipulated.
During the occurrence of the "special symbol low probability state", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is regarded as the first probability (hereinafter referred to as "low probability").
During the occurrence of the "special symbol high probability state", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is a second probability higher than the first probability (hereinafter, referred to as "high probability").
The main control board 200 sets the winning probability of each lottery so that the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery and the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery are synchronized. Here, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery means the probability of winning a "hit"("big hit 1" to "big hit 6") in which a big hit gaming state occurs.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery corresponds to the combination of the set value set in the set value area and the game state (special figure low probability state or special figure high probability state). It becomes a probability.

Specifically, while the set value = "0" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 319.69. On the other hand, while the set value = "0" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 32.13.
On the other hand, while the set value = "1" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 312.08. On the other hand, while the set value = "1" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 31.36.
On the other hand, while the set value = "2" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 304.82. On the other hand, while the set value = "2" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 30.62.

On the other hand, while the set value = "3" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 297.89. On the other hand, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 29.93 while the set value = "3" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring.
On the other hand, while the set value = "4" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 291.27. On the other hand, while the set value = "4" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 29.26.
On the other hand, while the set value = "5" and the "special symbol low probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 284.94. On the other hand, while the set value = "5" and the "special symbol high probability state" is occurring, the winning probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol lottery is 1 / 28.62.

When the "big hit 2" or the "big hit 6" is won, the "special figure low probability state" occurs in the period from the end of the big hit gaming state to the occurrence of the next big hit gaming state.
On the other hand, when "big hit 1" or "big hit 3" to "big hit 5" is won, a "special figure high probability state" is generated according to the end of the big hit gaming state. In the present embodiment, the "special figure high probability state" is started at the end of the big hit game state, and ends at the start of the next big hit game state (the end of the stop display of the "big hit symbol").
The "special figure high probability state" is started in response to the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the "special figure high probability state" is a predetermined number of times (for example, 10000 [ It may be configured to be terminated when the number of times]) is reached (a "special figure low probability state" is generated).

Further, when the "big hit 1" to "big hit 6" are won, the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state.
The time saving control is started in response to the end of the jackpot game state, and the special symbol lottery has been won (the "big hit symbol" has been stopped and displayed), and the notification display (variable display) of the special symbol having a predetermined number of time reductions. And stop display) is executed, and it is terminated when one of the conditions is satisfied.
When "Big hit 2" or "Big hit 6" is won, 100 [times] is set as a predetermined number of time reductions.
on the other hand. When "Big hit 1" or "Big hit 3" to "Big hit 5" is won, 10000 [times] is set as a predetermined number of time reductions.

(About control commands)
Next, control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 and control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 will be described.
The main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, the communication between the main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300, and the communication from the effect control board 300 to the main control board 200 is performed. Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 is composed of 1 byte of upper data indicating the type of control command and 1 byte of lower data indicating the content of the control command. There is.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control board 300 by serial communication. When the effect control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 include a symbol type specification command, a variation mode specification command, a variation pattern specification command, a stop specification command, a game state specification command, and a number of holds. Specified command, opening specified command, round start specified command, round end specified command, ending specified command, first look-ahead specified command, second look-ahead specified command, third look-ahead specified command, error specified command, demo specified command, set value specified Commands, game status specification commands, etc. are set.
The symbol type specification command is a command for specifying the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number). Specifically, the symbol type designation command specifies one type from "missing symbol" and "big hit 1 symbol" to "big hit 6 symbol". The symbol type specification command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the symbol type designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The variable mode specification command is a command for specifying the variable mode type (variable mode number). The variable mode specification command specifies the variable time associated with the variable mode number by specifying the variable mode number. The variation mode specification command specifies the variation time of the first half period (the mode of the first half period of the variation effect) in the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, as the type of the fluctuation mode, m (plurality) types in which different fluctuation times are associated with each other are set. Then, the variable mode designation command specifies one of m types of variable modes (variable mode number) (“variable mode m”).

The variation pattern specification command is a command that specifies the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number). The variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by specifying the variation pattern number. The variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time of the latter half period (the mode of the latter half period of the variation effect) in the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, as the types of fluctuation patterns, n (plurality) types in which different fluctuation times are associated with each other are set. Then, the variation pattern specification command specifies one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) (“variation pattern n”).
The variation mode specification command and the variation pattern specification command are transmitted at the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

The stop designation command is a command for designating the stop display of special symbols (effect symbols z1, z2). The stop specification command is sent at the start of the stop display of the special symbol.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the "game state offset value" is information that specifies the game state. In the present embodiment, as the game state offset value, each combination of the time saving control flag value, the special figure high probability state flag value, the previous big hit symbol flag value, and the big hit post-rotation speed counter value is used. The corresponding numerical value is set.
Then, the game state specification command specifies one game state offset value. The game state specification command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when the special game phase described later is changed, or the like.

The hold number specification command is a command for specifying the hold number. In the present embodiment, the hold number designation command specifies that the hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) has increased by "1", the hold number has decreased by "1", the hold number, and the like. ..
Here, the "special figure 1 hold number" means the number of hold of the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device. Further, the “special figure 2 hold number” means the number of hold of the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device.
The hold number designation command is transmitted at the time of turning on the power, storing the game information, starting the variable display of the special symbol, and the like. In the present embodiment, as the hold number designation command, a command corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is set.

The opening designation command is a command for designating the start of the opening period (start of the jackpot game state). The opening designation command specifies the type of jackpot game state (type of "big hit symbol"). Specifically, the opening designation command specifies one type from "1 jackpot symbol" to "6 jackpot symbols". The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the jackpot game state).
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of a round game. The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of the round game.
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of a round game. The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the round game.
The ending specification command is a command that specifies the start of the ending period. The ending specification command is sent at the beginning of the ending period.

The first look-ahead designation command is a command for designating the type of the stop symbol (one of the "missing symbol" and the "big hit 1 symbol" to the "big hit 6 symbol"). In the present embodiment, the first look-ahead designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The second look-ahead designation command is a command for designating the contents of the variable mode. Specifically, the second look-ahead specification command has an indefinite type of variable mode (“undefined value”), or one of m types of variable modes (variable mode number) (“variable mode m”). ) Is specified. The second look-ahead designation command is transmitted when the game information is stored.
The third look-ahead designation command is a command that specifies the content of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the third look-ahead designation command has an indefinite type of fluctuation pattern (“indefinite value”), or one of n types of fluctuation patterns (variation pattern number) (“variation pattern n”). ) Is specified. The third look-ahead designation command is transmitted when the game information is stored.

The error specification command is a command that specifies the occurrence of various errors. In the present embodiment, the error specification command specifies the occurrence of a vibration error, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, or a right-handed error. The error specification command is sent when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demo specification command is a command that specifies the start of the customer waiting state. The demo specification command is sent at the start of the customer waiting state.
The setting value specification command is a command for specifying a setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230. The setting value specification command is transmitted when the RAM is cleared, when the power is restored after the power is turned on, when the setting change state ends, when the setting confirmation state ends, and so on.
The game status designation command is a command for designating the occurrence (start) or cancellation (end) of the launchable state. The game status specification command is transmitted when the game-enabled state occurs (at the start) and when the game-enabled state is released (at the end).

The main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, the communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is performed in both directions. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is composed of 1 byte of data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the payout control board 400 by serial communication. When the payout control board 400 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Further, the payout control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. When the main control board 200 receives a control command from the payout control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, a prize ball number designation command or the like is set as a control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400.
The prize ball number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In the present embodiment, the prize ball number designation command specifies the payout of n (n = 1 to 15) prize balls. The prize ball number designation command is transmitted when the prize ball payout operation is executed by the payout control board 400.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200 include the occurrence / cancellation of a payout error, the occurrence / cancellation of a full tank error, and the occurrence / cancellation of a ball jam error. Control commands that specify each are set. Each control command is sent when the occurrence / cancellation of various errors is detected.

(Processing executed on the main control board 200)
Next, the process executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the random number generation circuit 203 starts the hard random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, the values of the first loop counter to the third loop counter are within a predetermined range every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 0.083 [μs] in this embodiment). (In the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) is updated by "1".

Further, in the hard random number update process, the value of the fourth loop counter is within a predetermined range every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 2.666 [μs] in this embodiment). In the embodiment, it is updated by "1" in the range of 0 to 10066).
Then, the hard random number update process updates the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number, respectively. The hard random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generation circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210, which will be described later, based on the software.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmit the control commands stored in the FIFO buffer to the effect control board 300 or the payout control board 400. The control command transmission process is started. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210, which will be described later, based on the software.

Next, the game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on the program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.

(CPU initialization process)
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. 7. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization process is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the CPU initialization process is started, the process first proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, the initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, the boot program is read from the ROM 220, and the settings necessary for executing various processes such as register settings are performed.

Further, in the initial setting process, the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 are read.
Specifically, the value set in the receive storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read 2 [times], and the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on based on the read result of 2 [times]. Is determined whether or not is occurring. Then, the determination result is saved as the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, when it is determined that the on state has occurred, a value indicating that the on state has occurred (“1” in the present embodiment) is saved as the switch information, and the on state occurs. If it is determined that the switch information is not set, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred (“0” in the present embodiment) is saved as the switch information.

Further, the reading of the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is executed 2 [times], and the on state is generated for the setting key switch 208 based on the reading result of 2 [times]. Judge whether or not it is done. Then, the determination result is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. At this time, when it is determined that the on state has occurred, a value indicating that the on state has occurred (“1” in the present embodiment) is saved as the switch information, and the on state occurs. If it is determined that the switch information is not set, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred (“0” in the present embodiment) is saved as the switch information.

Further, the reading of the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the inner frame opening sensor 108 is executed 2 [times], and the inner frame opening sensor 108 is turned on based on the reading result of 2 [times]. Is determined whether or not is occurring. Then, when it is determined that the on state has not occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value (“0” in the present embodiment) indicating that the on state has not occurred. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state has occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, the wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in the timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the wait processing time set by the timer counter is started.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed, and if it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the processing of steps S1-3 is repeated.

In step S1-4, the RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, a process necessary for permitting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as the RAM protect value in the RAM access protect area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is permitted.

In step S1-5, the gaming machine status flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the game machine state flag acquisition process, the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is stored (loaded) in the D register.
In step S1-6, it is determined whether or not the backup valid flag is normal, and if it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-7, and the backup valid flag is normal. If it is determined that this is not the case (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, when the value stored in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 (backup valid flag) is a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal, and the value stored in the backup valid flag area. If is not a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal.

In step S1-7, the checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, the checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
Next, among the backup information, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal, and if it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to steps S1-18.
Here, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1". When both conditions of "the checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in -7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area" are satisfied. Determine that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1-. The checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in 7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area. ”At least one of the conditions is satisfied. If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-9, the clear target area setting process at power-on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the power-on clear target area setting process, as a range for clearing (initializing) the used area M1 of the RAM 230, other areas excluding the set value area and the gaming machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, The backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are set.
In step S1-10, it is determined whether or not the ON state has occurred for the RAM clear switch 207, and if it is determined that the ON state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-11. If it is determined that the ON state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is in the ON state. At this time, if the value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the on state has occurred, and the value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved. If so, it is determined that the on state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether or not the playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the gameable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to steps S1-14.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the game machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine status flag stored in the D register has a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to the game-enabled state, the game is played. Judge that the possible state has not occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-13, and the setting confirmation condition is set. If it is determined that this is not the case (No), the process proceeds to steps S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is that the playable state has occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 has not been turned on, and the setting key switch 208 has been turned on. This is established when the frame opening sensor 108 is in the ON state.
Here, in step S1-1, when the on state has not occurred for the inner frame opening sensor 108, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the on state has not occurred. As a result, when the on state has occurred for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. .. On the other hand, when the on state has not occurred for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. Will be done.
Therefore, in step 1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if the value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and the value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved. If it is, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, the setting confirmation state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the setting confirmation status setting process, a value corresponding to the set value confirmation status is set as the gaming machine status flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, the clear target area setting process is executed when the power is restored, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the clear target area setting process when the power is restored, the set value area, the game machine state flag area, the normal game-related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area are defined as the range for clearing (initializing) the used area M1 of the RAM 230. Areas (specifically, a checksum area, a backup valid flag area, an error-related area, and a normal game-related area 1) are set.

In step S1-15, the initialization process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the initialization process when the power is restored, the range set in steps S1-14 of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-16, the subcommand transmission process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the power restoration subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (power restoration specification command) for specifying that the power has been restored from the power cutoff is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-17, the payout command transmission process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process when the power is restored, the payout command that specifies that the power has been restored from the power cutoff is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-18, the backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the game machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, the unused area read / write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the unused area read / write check process, the unused area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read / write check is performed.
In step S1-20, the processing for setting the area to be cleared at the time of abnormality is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormal clear target area setting process, all areas (specifically, the set value area, the gaming machine state flag area, the checksum area, and the backup valid flag) are set as the range for clearing (initializing) the used area M1 of the RAM 230. Areas, error-related areas, normal game-related areas 1, normal game-related areas 2, and stack areas) are set.
In step S1-21, the used area read / write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read / write check process, the range set in steps S1-20 of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and the read / write check is performed.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether or not the result of the read / write check performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 is normal, and when it is determined that the result of the read / write check is not normal (No). , Step S1-23, and if it is determined that the read / write check result is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, the RAM abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In steps S1-24, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to steps S1-25 and the setting is performed. If it is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to steps S1-26.
Here, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine status flag saved in the D register has a value corresponding to the setting confirmation status, it is determined that the setting confirmation status has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to the setting confirmation status, the setting is made. It is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred.
In step S1-25, the game-enabled state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the game-enabled state setting process, a value corresponding to the game-enabled state is set as the game machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-27, and the setting change condition is set. If it is determined that the condition is not established (No), the process proceeds to steps S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is that the RAM clear switch 207 is in the ON state, the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is in the ON state. It holds in the case.
Here, as described above, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108 are in the ON state, it is indicated that the ON state is generated as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. The value is saved. On the other hand, when the on state has not occurred for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. Will be done.
Therefore, in step 1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. ..
At this time, if the value indicating that the ON state has occurred is saved for both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, the setting change condition is satisfied. Is determined. On the other hand, when at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 has a value indicating that the on state has not occurred, the setting change condition is satisfied. Judge that it is not.

In step S1-27, the setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the game machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-28, the gaming machine status flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the game machine state flag saving process, the game machine state flag set in the D register is saved (saved) in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-29, the subcommand transmission process at the time of clearing the RAM is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (RAM clear specification command) that specifies that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-30, the initialization process at the time of clearing the RAM is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clearing initialization process, the range set in step S1-9 or step S1-20 in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-31, the issue command transmission process at the time of RAM clear is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the RAM clear payout command transmission process, the payout command specifying that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-32, the subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the subcommand setting process, the power-on gaming machine state specification command for specifying the current game machine state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, in the subcommand setting process, a subcommand output request for the RAM 230 is used to issue a power-on game machine state specification command that specifies the game machine state flag (game machine state) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. Store in the buffer.
In step S1-33, the subcommand group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, in the subcommand group, a subcommand for specifying the power recovery phase, a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the firing position, and a stop symbol for the first special symbol are specified. Subcommand to be executed, a subcommand to specify the stop symbol of the second special symbol, a subcommand to specify the number of special figure 1 hold, a subcommand to specify the number of hold of special figure 2, a subcommand to specify the value of the time reduction counter, RAM230 It includes a setting value specification command that specifies the setting value stored in the setting value area of.

In step S1-34, the initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in the initial display timer.
In step S1-35, the interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, the CTC (counter / timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initially set.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, the interrupt vector register is set, and the interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(Main loop processing)
Next, the main loop process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main loop processing.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in FIG. 7 is completed, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In interrupt prohibition processing, an interrupt prohibition state that prohibits interrupts of other processing is set. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of the power-off save time processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, the initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number for determining the initial value and the end value of soft random numbers (hit symbol random numbers, reach mode random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) that are random numbers generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within the range from the preset initial value to the end value. Then, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed every time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, the main command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the payout control board 400 (control command transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and the process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, the subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, the interrupt enable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt enable processing, the interrupt disable state is canceled. As a result, during the period from the execution of the interrupt enable processing in step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition process in step S2-1, execution of the power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted. This is the interrupt enable period.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update process, the soft random numbers excluding the hit symbol random numbers (specifically, reach mode random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Evacuation processing when power is cut off)
Next, the evacuation process when the power is cut off, which is executed by the CPU 210, will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an evacuation process when the power is cut off.
The main control board 200 includes a power supply cutoff detection circuit (not shown). The power supply cutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600, and outputs a power supply cutoff warning signal to the input port 204 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
Upon receiving the power cutoff warning signal, the CPU 210 starts the power cutoff save process shown in FIG. 9 during the interrupt enable period of the main loop process. The evacuation process when the power is cut off is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the evacuation process when the power is cut off is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the power-off time evacuation process is started, the process first proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register save process, the value of the register used during the execution of the main loop process is saved in the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, the power cutoff warning signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-3, is the power cutoff warning signal input from the power cutoff detection circuit based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal)? When it is determined whether or not the power cutoff warning signal is input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and when it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal is not input (No). Goes to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, the output port stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop processing, the output of the control signal and the control command by the output port 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stop processing, the values of all the bits included in the port registers of the output port 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) are initialized. As a result, the output of the control signal and the control command by the output port 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped.
In step S3-5, the backup enable flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is saved in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S3-6, the checksum saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum save process, the checksum is calculated and saved.
Specifically, in the checksum storage process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230.
Next, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is saved in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, the RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to the access prohibition is stored as the RAM protect value in the RAM access protect area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, the loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times of reading the power cutoff warning signal is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-9, the power cutoff warning signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-10, is the power cutoff warning signal input from the power cutoff detection circuit based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal)? When it is determined whether or not the power cutoff warning signal has been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and when it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has been input (Yes). Goes to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, the loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is "0" (Yes), the CPU When the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S1-1) and it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, the register return process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S3-1 is restored. Then, after the register return processing is completed, the process returns to the main loop processing (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The clock generation circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
The CPU 210 starts the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 during the interrupt enable period of the main loop process in response to the generation of the interrupt request signal. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, interrupt enable processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt enable process, interrupts are allowed.
In step S4-3, the dynamic port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. The dynamic port output processing will be described later.

In step S4-4, the port input process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In the port input process, the status of each switch sensor (each signal) is acquired.
The RAM 230 has an input information storage area corresponding to each switch sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), and an input port 204 (input). An on-state storage area corresponding to each switch sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the port 0 to the input port 3) is provided.
In the port input process, first, for each switch sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to the switch sensor is acquired. The acquired information is stored (stored) in the input information storage area corresponding to the switch sensor.
As a result, when the detection signal from the switch sensor is input (high level) for each switch sensor, "1" is stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the switch sensor, and the switch sensor is stored. If the detection signal from the switch sensor is not input (low level), "0" is stored in the input storage area corresponding to the switch sensor.

Next, it is determined whether or not each switch sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3) is in the ON state. At this time, for each switch sensor, the on state is set based on the value saved in the input information storage area in the previous port input process and the value saved in the input information storage area in the current port input process. Determine if it has occurred.
The "on state" means a state in which the detection signal is not input (low level) to a state in which the detection signal is input (high level).
Then, when it is determined that the on state has occurred for each switch sensor, "1" is set in the on state storage area corresponding to the switch sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that the on state has not occurred for each switch sensor, "0" is set in the on state storage area corresponding to the switch sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the on-state storage area corresponding to each switch sensor is referred to as “switch bit data” of the switch sensor.
In particular, the input port 1 is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal input from the launchable condition detection unit 422. Then, in the port input process, the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal of the input port 1 is acquired, and the acquired information is stored (stored) in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal. ).

In step S4-5, the gaming machine status flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the game machine state flag acquisition process, the game machine state flag stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether or not the playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the gameable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-7 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, based on the gaming machine status flag acquired in step S4-5, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the gameable state, the gameable state is generated. Judge that it is not.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that no abnormal state has occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and the abnormal state is changed. If it is determined that it has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that the abnormal state has occurred. If the acquired gaming machine status flag is not a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal status, the RAM abnormal status, and the backup abnormal status, it is determined that the abnormal status has not occurred.

In step S4-8, the setting-related process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. The setting-related processing will be described later.
In step S4-9, the timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, in the timer update process, the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.) are updated.
In step S4-10, the initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, the hit symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the hit symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the hit symbol random number is updated among the soft random numbers.
In step S4-12, the switch management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management process, processing (acquisition of various random numbers, etc.) according to the state of each switch 101, 102, 104 (whether or not the on state is detected) is executed. The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, the special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display device and the operation of the special electric accessory 53a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-14, the normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the ordinary game management process, the operation of the normal drawing display device and the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.

In step S4-15, the state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the state management process, the occurrence / cancellation of various errors (abnormal states) is monitored. Then, when the occurrence / cancellation of various errors is detected, various settings (subcommand settings, etc.) are executed.
In the state management process, the value saved in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal (the value saved in the previous timer interrupt process and the value saved in the current timer interrupt process) is used. Then, it is determined whether or not the handle detection signal has changed from the state in which the signal has not been input to the state in which the handle detection signal has been input. Then, when it is determined that the handle detection signal has changed from the non-input state to the input state, the game status specification command for designating the occurrence of the launchable state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Further, in the state management process, it is based on the value saved in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal (the value saved in the previous timer interrupt process and the value saved in the current timer interrupt process). It is determined whether or not the handle detection signal has changed from the input state to the non-input state. Then, when it is determined that the handle detection signal has changed from the input state to the non-input state, the game status specification command for specifying the release of the fireable state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-16, the winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the winning opening switch processing, processing (update of various counters, etc.) according to the state (whether or not the ON state is detected) of each switch 101-103, 105, 106 is executed.

In step S4-17, the payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In the present embodiment, as the prize ball control counter, the prize ball control counter 1 in which the number of ball game balls entered in the large winning opening 53 and the number of ball game balls entered in the right other winning opening 54 are stored. Prize ball control counter 2, upper left, middle left, lower left, etc. The prize ball control counter 3 that stores the number of ball game balls that have entered the winning openings 55 to 57, and the ball game ball that has entered the first starting port 51. A prize ball control counter 4 for storing the number of balls and a prize ball control counter 5 for storing the number of ball games that have entered the second starting port 52 are set.
Then, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command for specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (15 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, when the payout control board 400 completes the payout of the prize ball by the game ball payout device 440, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command for designating the completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more, a payout command for specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more, a payout command for specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more, a payout command for specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (3 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more, a payout command for specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (1 [ball] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, the launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the launch position designation management process, the process related to the designation of the launch position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when changing from a state in which the launch of the game ball to the left route is specified to a state in which the launch of the game ball to the right route is specified (at the start of the jackpot game state, etc.). , "1" is set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230, and the subcommand for designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a subcommand for designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the effect control board 300.
On the other hand, when changing from the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the right route to the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the left route (at the end of the time reduction control, etc.), the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is set to " Set "0".

In step S4-19, the external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In the present embodiment, as external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (electronic device such as a hall computer or a data display device), symbol confirmation count information, start port information, jackpot information, security information, and out port Information on the number of payouts, information on the occurrence of errors, etc. are specified.
The "design fixed number of times information" is external information regarding the number of times the special symbol lottery (variation display and stop display of the special symbol) is executed. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol confirmation count information to the hall computer (or data display device) every time the number of executions of the stop display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number.

The "starting port information" is external information regarding the entry of the game ball into the starting ports 51 and 52. Each time the ON state of the detection signal input from the start port switches 101 and 102 is detected, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the start port information to the hall computer (or data display device).
The "big hit information" is external information regarding the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. The main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time a jackpot gaming state occurs.
The “out port payout information” is external information regarding the number of game balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of game balls discharged from the out port 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the out-port payout number information to the hall computer every time the value of the out-ball number counter for external information reaches a predetermined value.
The "security information" is external information indicating that the setting change state is occurring, the setting confirmation state is occurring, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. When the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hall computer.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the fixed number counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the confirmation count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the symbol confirmation count information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the fixed number counter for external information. As a result, the symbol confirmation count information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port entry count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the start port entry count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the start port information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the start port entry count counter for external information. As a result, the starting port information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the jackpot count counter for external information. As a result, the jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the out-ball number counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the out-ball count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the out-port payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the out-ball number counter for external information. As a result, the out-of-port withdrawal information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state.
Then, it is determined that the value stored in the game machine state flag area is not a value corresponding to the game-enabled state (setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting abnormality state, RAM abnormality state, or backup abnormality state). If it is determined to be a value), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the security timer is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In step S4-20, the LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits). Has been done.
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized) and the common 3 output request buffer is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set for each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer, and "0" is set for each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer.

Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Then, when the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, the normal display data setting process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to the setting change status, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation status, the display data setting process at the time of setting confirmation, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the acquired game machine status flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal status (setting abnormal status, RAM abnormal status, or backup abnormal status), the abnormal time display data setting process described later is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the acquired value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is stored in the common 0 output request buffer. Set.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the first special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 1 to LED8.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the acquired value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the second special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 9 to 16.
Next, the value of the general symbol display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value of the general symbol display symbol counter is set as the output data a.

Next, the values set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 are the "pre-opening state of the large winning opening", the "opening control state of the large winning opening", the "valid state of closing the large winning opening", and the "opening of the large winning opening". It is determined whether or not it is a value that specifies any of the special game phases in the "end wait state".
Then, the values set in the special game phase flag area are the "pre-opening state of the large winning opening", the "opening control state of the large winning opening", the "valid state of closing the large winning opening", and the "waiting state of opening the large winning opening". If it is determined that the value specifies one of the special game phases, the value set in the special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230 (value corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol) is acquired and acquired. The display data corresponding to the set value is set as the output data b.
On the other hand, the values set in the special game phase flag area are the "pre-opening state of the large winning opening", the "opening control state of the large winning opening", the "valid state of closing the large winning opening", and the "waiting state of opening the large winning opening". If it is determined that the value does not specify any of the special game phases, the output data b is not set.

Next, the value set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data c.
Next, the display data (8 bits) that is the logical sum of the output data a to the output data c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the ordinary symbols are displayed by the LEDs 17 and 18, and the number of round games executed during the big hit game state by the LEDs 19 to 23 (type of the big hit game state). Is displayed, and the LED 24 indicates the route (left route or right route) at which the game ball should be launched.
Next, the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data d.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data e.
Next, the value of the normal figure hold number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data f.
Next, it is determined whether or not the power is restored.
Then, when it is determined that the power is restored, the value set in the special figure high probability state flag area is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data g.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the power is not restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data h.
Next, the display data (8 bits) that is the logical sum of the output data d to the output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the special figure 1 hold number is displayed by the LEDs 25 and 26, the special figure 2 hold number is displayed by the LEDs 27 and 28, and the special figure 2 hold number is displayed by the LEDs 29 and 30. The number of holds is displayed, the game state at the time of power recovery (during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state or the occurrence of the special figure low probability state) is displayed by the LED 31, and the current game state (execution of the time saving control) is displayed by the LED 32. Medium or stopped) is displayed.

In the setting change display data setting process, information indicating that the setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and is stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230. The information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." Is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and "-" The display data (8 bits) of is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the characters "r" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 49 to LED56. The characters "-" are displayed, and the numbers indicating the set values are displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64.

In the setting confirmation display data setting process, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and is stored in the set value area of the RAM 230. The information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." Is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the RAM 230 is set. The display data corresponding to the set value stored in the value area is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (the clear value remains).
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the characters "r" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 57 to LED64. A number indicating the value is displayed. The LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In the abnormal display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer. At the same time, the error code corresponding to the generated abnormality is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "E" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "r." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and an abnormality occurs. The display data (error code) corresponding to the status (setting abnormal status, RAM abnormal status, or backup abnormal status) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (the clear value remains).
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the letters "E" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the letters "r." are displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and an error occurs by the LEDs 57 to LED64. A number indicating the code is displayed. The LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In step S4-21, the solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, the control data (drive data) to be output to each of the solenoids 64 and 65 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-22, the port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, each solenoid 64, 65, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signal, control signal, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output port 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer. Further, the solenoids 64 and 65 are driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In interrupt prohibition processing, an interrupt prohibition state that prohibits interrupts of other processing is set. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of the power-off save time processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, the test signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is a process based on a program for executing the process related to the test specified in the game machine rules. That is, the test signal output process is a process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal tube is called during execution of timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating an internal state (big hit game state, time saving control execution state, special symbol lottery probability state, etc.) is sent to the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Remember.
In step S4-25, the performance display device control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26. The performance display device control process will be described later.
In step S4-26, the register return process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S4-1 is restored. Then, after the register return processing is completed, the process returns to the main loop processing (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output process in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the dynamic port output process.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 11, first, the process proceeds to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, the output data clearing process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clearing process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set as each bit value of the A register.
In step S29-2, the main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 0. As a result, the output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 becomes a low level.

In step S29-3, the performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 4. As a result, the output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206 becomes a low level.
In step S29-4, the common selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether or not the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit value (“3” in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit value, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the common counter.

In step S29-5, the common output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6.
In the common output process, the output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to the output port 1.
That is, when the value of the common counter = "0", the output data in which "COM0" is set to the high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" are set to the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the output data in which "COM1" is set to the high level and "COM0", "COM2", and "COM3" are set to the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the output data in which "COM2" is set to the high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM3" are set to the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the output data in which "COM3" is set to the high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM2" are set to the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".

Further, in the common output process, the output data of the launch permission signal is output to the output port 1.
That is, first, it is determined whether or not the playable state has occurred (set).
Then, when it is determined that the playable state has occurred, the output data having the launch permission signal at a high level is output to the output port 1. As a result, a launch permission signal is output.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the playable state has not occurred, the output data having the launch permission signal at the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, the output of the launch permission signal is stopped.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, the game is played. Judge that the possible state has not occurred.
In the present embodiment, the output of the launch permission signal is set only when it is determined that the playable state has occurred in the common output process. As a result, the launch permission signal is output only during the occurrence (setting) of the game-enabled state. However, in the common output process, the output of the launch permission signal may be set regardless of the state of the gaming machine. With such a configuration, the launch permission signal can be output at all times during the period when the power is turned on to the main control board 200.

In step S29-6, it is determined whether or not the playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the gameable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, the game is played. Judge that the possible state has not occurred.

In step S29-7, the main display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, the display data for the main display device 60 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. Set.
At this time, when the value of the common counter = "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is common in the LED display setting process (specifically, the normal display data setting process) in step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process. 0 Output request buffer to common 3 Display data set in the output request buffer.

In step S29-8, the main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to the output port 0.
As a result, the data signal ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) becomes the source driver. It is output for 250a.
That is, the display of the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In interrupt prohibition processing, an interrupt prohibition state that prohibits interrupts of other processing is set. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of the power-off save time processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, the performance display device output process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). The performance display device output processing will be described later.

In step S29-11, the performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, the display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. Set.
At this time, when the value of the common counter = "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the LED display setting process (specifically, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, the setting confirmation) in step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process. The display data is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in the time display data setting process or the abnormal time display data setting process).

In step S29-12, the performance display device data output process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, the data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) are converted into the source driver. It is output for 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the performance display device output process.
The performance display device output process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. That is, the performance display device output process is a process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device output process is called during execution of the dynamic port output process.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, first, as shown in FIG. 12, the process proceeds to step S30-1.
In step S30-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register save processing, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area. In addition, all the stack pointer values used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area.

In step S30-2, the performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, the display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, among the identification segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230, the display data set in the area corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register. ..
At this time, when the value of the common counter = "0", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control process in step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt process. It becomes the displayed data.

In step S30-3, the performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, the register return process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register return processing, the register value saved in step S30-1 (the value of the register used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the register value in step S30-1. The saved stack pointer value (value of the stack pointer used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the saved stack pointer value are restored.
In step S30-5, interrupt enable processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-4). In the interrupt enable processing, the interrupt disable state is canceled. As a result, execution of save processing when the power is cut off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Setting-related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, as shown in FIG. 13, first, the process proceeds to step S37-1.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether or not the setting change state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting change state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2 and the setting is performed. If it is determined that the changed state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, it is determined whether or not the setting change state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the gaming machine status flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the setting change state, the setting is made. It is determined that the change state has not occurred.

In step S37-2, the set value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the set value acquisition process, the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded), and the acquired set value is stored in the register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4 and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed. If it is determined that 207 has not been pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
Here, regarding the RAM clear switch 207, if the ON state has occurred, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if the ON state has not occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed. judge.
In step S37-4, the set value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the set value update process, "1" is added to the set value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the register is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (“6” in this embodiment), and the set value stored in the register is predetermined. If it is determined that the value is not less than the setting comparison value of (No), the process proceeds to step S37-6, and the setting value stored in the register is the predetermined setting comparison. If it is determined that the value is less than the value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, the set value initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the set value initialization process, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is overwritten as the set value stored in the register.
In step S37-7, the set value saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the set value saving process, the set value stored in the register is saved in the set value area of the RAM 230.

In step S37-8, when it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state and it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (it is in the OFF state) (No). Goes to step S37-9, and when it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state (Yes), the process ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). ..
Here, regarding the setting key switch 208, if the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, and if the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state, the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. Judge that it is not done.
In step S37-9, the subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the subcommand setting process, the setting-related end specification command (subcommand) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S37-10, the subcommand group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, the subcommand group includes a subcommand that specifies the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand that specifies the firing position, a subcommand that specifies the stop symbol of the first special symbol, and a stop of the second special symbol. Subcommand to specify the symbol, Special Figure 1 Subcommand to specify the number of holds, Special Figure 2 Subcommand to specify the number of holds, Subcommand to specify the value of the time reduction counter, Settings stored in the set value area of RAM 230 A setting value specification command that specifies a value is included.
In step S37-11, the ram set process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). In the ram set process, a game-enabled state is set as the game machine state.
Specifically, as the value of the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 (gaming machine status flag), the value corresponding to the playable state is saved (saved).

(Switch management process)
Next, the switch management process in step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, first, as shown in FIG. 14, the process proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the gate switch 104 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the gate switch 104 is detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2 and the gate If it is determined that the ON state of the switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, the normal drawing start ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal figure starting ball detection process will be described later.
In addition, in the normal drawing start ball detection process, it is determined whether or not the right-handed period is in progress. Then, when it is determined that the player is not in the right-handed period (the player is in the left-handed period), "1" is added to the value of the right-handed error counter.
In the present embodiment, the period in which one of the game states of the jackpot game state and the time reduction control is being executed is the right-handed period. On the other hand, the period during which the normal game state (the game state in which the jackpot game state is not occurring and the time reduction control is stopped) is generated is the left-handed period.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected (Yes), step S5-3 is performed. If it is determined in S5-4 that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. Special Figure 1 The starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected (Yes), step S5-5 is performed. If it is determined in S5-6 that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected (No), a series of processes are completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). do.
In step S5-6, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). Special Figure 2 The starting ball detection process will be described later.

(Public figure start ball detection process)
Next, the normal drawing start ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a normal drawing start ball detection process.
When the normal figure start ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 15, first, the process proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, the normal figure random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the normal figure random number acquisition process, the winning random number (random number value) is acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure hold number counter is the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment), and it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is not the upper limit value. In (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), a series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5-). Move to 3).
In step S6-3, the normal figure hold number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the normal figure hold number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the normal figure hold number counter is newly set in the normal figure hold number counter.

In step S6-4, the normal figure random number storage process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the normal figure random number storage process, the hit random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the normal figure game information storage area of the RAM 230 as the normal figure game information.
The RAM 230 includes a storage area 0 for storing the normal map game information during the execution of the game, and a normal map game information storage area for storing the normal map game information for which the normal map winning determination is held. Has been done.
The Fuzu game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the Fuzu game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (upper → lower) in descending order of priority. Then, as for the Fuzu game information stored in the Fuzu game information storage area, the Fuzu winning determination is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area having a higher priority.
In the normal figure random number storage process, the hit random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the normal figure game information storage area as the normal figure game information. At this time, the Fuzu game information is stored in the storage area having the highest priority among the vacant storage areas.
That is, when the value of the current number of reserved numbers counter in the normal figure = "1", the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 1. When the value of the current number of reserved numbers counter = "2", the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 2. When the value of the current number of reserved numbers counter = "3", the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 3. When the value of the current number of reserved numbers counter = "4", the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the storage area 4.

(Special figure 1 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a special drawing 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, first, as shown in FIG. 16, the process proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, the special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, the special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the start port entry count counter for external information.
Further, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not the right-handed period is in progress. Then, when it is determined that the right-handed error counter is not in progress (the left-handed player is in the left-handed period), the value of the right-handed error counter is reset (“0” is set as the value of the right-handed error counter).
In step S7-2, the hold number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the hold number counter address setting process, the address of the hold number counter is set in the hold number counter address setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-3, the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special figure 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a special drawing 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, first, as shown in FIG. 17, the process proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, the special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, the special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the start port entry count counter for external information.
Further, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not the right-handed period is in progress. Then, when it is determined that the player is not in the right-handed period (the player is in the left-handed period), "1" is added to the value of the right-handed error counter.
In step S8-2, the hold number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the hold number counter address setting process, the address of the hold number counter in FIG. 2 is set in the hold number counter address area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-3, the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special symbol random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 18, first, the process proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, the special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, the special figure pending number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure hold number acquisition process, the value of the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area (special figure 1 hold). Acquire (load) the number or the number reserved in Special Figure 2.

In step S9-3, the special figure random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special figure random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random number values) such as a jackpot random number, a hit symbol random number, a reach group random number, a reach mode random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) acquired in step S9-2 is the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). If it is determined that the number of reserved special figures is not the upper limit (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5, and if it is determined that the number of reserved special figures is not the upper limit (Yes), a series of processes are performed. Is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5).
In step S9-5, the special figure hold number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure hold number counter update process, the value set in the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area. The value obtained by adding "1" to is newly set in the special figure hold number counter.

In step S9-6, the special figure random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storage process, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as special figure game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game) of the RAM 230. It is stored in the information storage area or the special figure 2 game information storage area).
The RAM 230 has a storage area 0 in which special figure game information during game execution is stored, a special figure 1 game information storage area in which start determination is held, and a special figure 1 game information storage area in which start determination is held. It is configured to include the special figure 2 game information storage area.
The special figure 1 game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 1 game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (upper → lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the start determination of the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area having a higher priority.
The special figure 2 game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 1 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 2 game information.
The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (upper → lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the start determination of the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area having a higher priority.

In the special figure random number storage process, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special figure 1 game information. , Special figure 1 Stored in the game information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area having the highest priority among the vacant storage areas.
That is, when the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "1", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. When the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "2", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. When the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "3", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. When the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "4", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.
On the other hand, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special diagram 2 game information as the special diagram 2 game. Store in the information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area having the highest priority among the vacant storage areas.
That is, when the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = "1", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. When the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = "2", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. When the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = "3", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. When the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = "4", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.

In step S9-7, the hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the hold number specification command setting process, the hold number specification command that specifies that the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. do. At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, a hold number designation command for designating that the number of special symbol 1 hold has increased by "1". Is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230, and when the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the hold number specification command for specifying that the special figure 2 hold number has increased by "1" is executed by the RAM 230. Stored in the subcommand output request buffer of.

In step S9-8, the pre-determination process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S4-13 or S5-5). In the pre-judgment process, the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure) stored (stored) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) in step S9-6. 2 Various lottery results are preliminarily determined based on the game information) (hereinafter referred to as "preliminary determination target game information").
In the present embodiment, various lottery results are preliminarily determined for all game information (special figure 1 game information and special figure 2 game information).
The game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the big hit game state may be configured so that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed. Further, regarding the special figure 2 game information acquired (stored) while the time saving control is stopped, the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the special figure 1 game information acquired (stored) during the execution of the time saving control is not executed. The above may be configured so that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed.

In the pre-determination process, first, the pre-special figure hit determination process is executed.
In the pre-special symbol hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery (“big hit” or “missing”) is determined (pre-special symbol hit determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol winning lottery table in which the jackpot value of the special symbol lottery is registered. In addition, as the special figure winning lottery table, it corresponds to each combination of the set value ("1" to "6") and the game state ("special figure low probability state" or "special figure high probability state"). The special figure winning lottery table and is stored.
Specifically, as the special figure winning lottery table, "set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "setting value 1 high probability special figure winning lottery table", and "set value 2 low probability special figure winning lottery table""Figure winning lottery table", "Set value 2 High accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "Setting value 3 Low accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "Setting value 3 High accuracy special figure winning lottery table""Set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "setting value 4 high probability special figure winning lottery table", "setting value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table", "setting value 4 "5 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table", "set value 6 low-accuracy special figure winning lottery table", and "set value 6 high-accuracy special figure winning lottery table" are stored.

In the "set value 0 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "0" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 0 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "204" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 0 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "0" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 0 high probability special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "2039" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "1" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 1 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "209" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 1 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "1" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 1 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "2089" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 2 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "2" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 2 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "214" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 2 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "2" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 2 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "2139" are registered as jackpot values.

In the "set value 3 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "3" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 3 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "219" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 3 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "3" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 3 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "2189" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "4" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 4 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "224" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 4 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "4" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 4 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "2239" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "5" and "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure low probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 5 low probability special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "229" are registered as jackpot values.
In the "set value 5 high probability special figure winning lottery table", the set value = "5" and "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area (occurrence of "special figure high probability state"). If (in), it is selected. Then, in the "set value 5 high accuracy special figure winning lottery table", among the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535", "0" to "2289" are registered as jackpot values.

In the pre-special figure hit determination process, the value (set value) set in the set value area and the current gaming state (“special figure high probability state” or “special figure low probability state”) are confirmed. , Read the special figure winning lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result.
Then, the result of the special symbol lottery (“big hit” or “missing”) is determined based on the big hit random number included in the pre-judgment target game information and the read special figure winning lottery table (preliminary special figure hit judgment). do.
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-judgment target game information matches the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit". "(Winning) is judged.
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-judgment target game information does not match the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table (if it matches the outlier), it is special. The result of the symbol lottery is judged to be "outlier" (lost).

In the pre-determination process, the pre-special symbol symbol determination process is then executed. In the pre-special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (pre-special symbol determination).
In the pre-special symbol determination process, when the pre-special symbol hit determination determines "big hit" (winning), the type of "big hit symbol" is determined (pre-special symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "big hit symbol" is registered. Further, as the jackpot symbol lottery table, a first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and a second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are stored.
Then, in the first big hit symbol lottery table, "big hit 1 symbol" and "big hit 2 symbols" are registered as the types of "big hit symbols". On the other hand, in the second big hit symbol lottery table, "big hit 3 symbols" to "big hit 6 symbols" are registered as the types of "big hit symbols".
Then, when the game information to be determined in advance is the special figure 1 game information, the first big hit symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the hit symbol random number included in the game information to be determined in advance and the read first jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the game information to be determined in advance is the special figure 2 game information, the second big hit symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information to be determined in advance and the second jackpot symbol lottery table read out.
On the other hand, in the pre-special symbol determination process, if it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the pre-special symbol hit determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stop symbol (pre-special symbol determination). ..

In the pre-determination process, the first look-ahead designation command setting process is then executed.
In the first look-ahead designation command setting process, the first look-ahead designation command for designating the type of the stop symbol determined by the prior special symbol symbol determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the pre-determination process, next, the pre-special figure variation mode determination process is executed.
At this time, if it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the pre-special figure hit determination, the pre-special figure fluctuation state determination process at the time of defeat, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the preliminary special figure hit determination, the advance special figure change mode determination process at the time of winning, which will be described later, is executed.

In the pre-selection change mode determination process at the time of defeat, first, the pre-random number type determination is executed.
In the pre-random number type determination, it is determined which of the "indefinite value" and the "fixed value" the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is.
Here, when the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is an "indefinite value", the variable mode number is acquired (remembered) when the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is acquired. (Primary fluctuation mode number) and fluctuation pattern number are not determined.
On the other hand, when the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is a "fixed value", the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is acquired (memorized) (step S9-8). The variation mode number (primary variation mode number) and the variation pattern number are determined at the time of execution.
In the present embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated in the range of "0" to "10006". Of "0" to "10006", "0" to "8499" are set as "indefinite values", and "8500" to "10006" are set as "fixed values".
Therefore, in the pre-random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is less than "8500", it is determined as "indefinite value" and the reach group included in the pre-determination target game information. When the value of the random number is "8500" or more, it is determined as "fixed value".

In the pre-selection variation mode determination process at the time of defeat, when it is determined as a "fixed value" by the pre-random number type determination, further, the pre-reach group determination, the defeat pre-variation mode determination, the defeat pre-variation pattern determination, and the defeat pre-variation pattern determination. To execute.
In the pre-selection variation mode determination process, when the pre-random number type determination determines an "indefinite value", the pre-reach group determination, the defeated pre-variation mode determination, and the defeated variation pattern determination are performed. Not executed.

In the pre-reach group determination, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which the correspondence between the reach group random number and the reach group number (type of reach group) is registered.
In addition, as the reach group determination table, the hold type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of holds ("0" to "3"), and the game state (low probability state, time saving state, etc.) The reach group determination table corresponding to each combination of the probabilistic state (during the probabilistic state or the latent state) is stored.
Here, in the present embodiment, the game state is defined as a low probability state, a time saving state, a probability change state, and a latent probability state.
The "low probability state" is a gaming state in which the special figure low probability state is occurring and the time saving control is stopped. The "time saving state" is a gaming state in which the special figure low probability state is occurring and the time saving control is being executed. The "probability change state" is a gaming state in which the special figure high probability state is occurring and the time saving control is being executed. The "latent state" is a gaming state in which the special figure high probability state is occurring and the time saving control is stopped.
In the pre-reach group determination, first, the hold type (type of game information subject to pre-judgment (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of holds, and the game state are confirmed, and the confirmation result is used. The corresponding reach group determination table is read. At this time, the number of holds is assumed to be "0".
Then, the reach group number is determined based on the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read reach group determination table.

In the pre-variable mode determination at the time of defeat, the variable mode number (type of variable mode) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a variation mode determination table in which correspondence between the reach mode random number and the variation mode number (variation mode type) is registered.
Further, as the variation mode determination table, a variation mode determination table at the time of defeat and a variation mode determination table at the time of winning are stored.
Further, as the defeated variation mode determination table, the defeated variation mode determination table corresponding to each reach group number (for each type of reach group) is stored.
In particular, in each variation mode determination table, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table (information for specifying the variation pattern determination table) are associated with each reach mode random number. .. As a result, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table are simultaneously selected based on each variation mode determination table.
In the pre-selection variation mode determination, first, the reach group number determined by the pre-reach group determination is confirmed, and the defeated variation mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table are determined based on the reach mode random number included in the game information to be determined in advance and the read out variation mode determination table at the time of defeat.

In the pre-decision pattern determination, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a variation pattern determination table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is registered.
Further, as the fluctuation pattern determination table, a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables having different contents are stored.
In the pre-decision pre-variation pattern determination, first, the variation pattern determination table determined by the defeat pre-variation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information to be determined in advance and the read variation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, in the pre-winning pre-special figure variation mode determination process, first, the pre-winning pre-variation mode determination is executed.
In the pre-variable mode determination at the time of winning, the variable mode number (type of variable mode) is determined.
In the winning pre-variation mode determination, first, the winning variation mode determination table is read.
Then, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table are determined based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read-out variation mode determination table at the time of winning.

In the pre-winning pre-special figure variation mode determination process, next, the pre-winning pre-variation pattern determination is executed.
In the pre-winning variation pattern determination, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined.
In the winning pre-variation pattern determination, first, the variation pattern determination table determined by the winning pre-variation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information to be determined in advance and the read variation pattern determination table.

In the pre-determination process, the second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes are then executed.
In the second and third look-ahead designation command setting processing, if it is determined as "missing" (lost) by the pre-special figure hit judgment and "fixed value" by the pre-random number type judgment, it is prior to the time of losing. A subcommand output request for the RAM 230 is a second look-ahead specification command that specifies the variation mode number determined by the variation mode determination, and a third look-ahead specification command that specifies the variation pattern number determined by the pre-selection variation pattern determination at the time of defeat. Store in the buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the pre-special figure hit judgment and "indefinite value" is determined by the pre-random number type judgment, the second look-ahead specification command for specifying the "indefinite value" is used. , A third look-ahead specification command for specifying an "indefinite value" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the pre-special figure hit judgment, the second look-ahead designation command for specifying the fluctuation mode number determined by the pre-variation mode judgment at the time of winning and the pre-variation pattern at the time of winning The third look-ahead designation command for designating the variation pattern number determined by the determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

As described above, when the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is a "fixed value", the variation mode number and the variation pattern number are determined, and the determined variation mode number and the variation pattern number are specified. The second and third look-ahead designation commands are transmitted to the effect control board 300.
On the other hand, when the value of the reach group random number included in the game information to be pre-determined is an "indefinite value", the fluctuation mode number and the fluctuation pattern number are not determined, and the "indefinite value" is specified. A look-ahead designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 300.

(Special game management process)
Next, the special game management process of step S4-13 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special game management process.
In the present embodiment, as the phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase") of the game (hereinafter referred to as "special game") executed based on the special symbol lottery, "special figure change waiting state", "Special figure changing state", "Special figure stop symbol display state", "Large winning opening opening state", "Large winning opening opening control state", "Large winning opening closing effective state" and "Large winning opening opening end" Seven "wait states" are specified.
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven special game phases is set.
Further, the ROM 220 stores a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase as a special game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the special game.
Then, in the special game management process, the special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, as shown in FIG. 19, first, the process proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, the special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, the special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read out.
In step S10-3, the special game control module execution process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read out in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state", the special figure change waiting process described later is started, and the "special figure changing state" is started. If the value corresponds to, the special figure changing process described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "special figure stopped symbol display state", the special figure stopped processing described later is started. If it is a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening state", the large winning opening pre-opening process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening control state", it will be described later. When the large winning opening opening control process is started and the value corresponds to the "large winning opening closing effective state", the large winning opening closing effective processing described later is started and the "large winning opening opening end wait state" is set. If it is the corresponding value, the large winning opening opening end wait processing described later is started.

(Special figure change waiting process)
Next, the special figure change waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a special figure change waiting process.
When the special figure change waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 20, first, the process proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not "1" or more (No). Goes to step S11-2, and when it is determined (Yes) that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more, it goes to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is "1" or more, and it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes). In step S11-3, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is not “1” or more (No), the process proceeds to step S11-16.

In step S11-3, the special figure hold number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special figure hold number update process, the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure hold number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more.
Then, when the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more, a value for designating the game based on the special figure 2 game information ("1" in this embodiment) is set as the special symbol discrimination flag setting value. At the same time as setting, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not "1" or more (the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "0"), the special figure 1 game information is set as the special symbol discrimination flag setting value. A value (“0” in this embodiment) for designating the game based on the above is set, and “1” is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter.
In step S11-4, the hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the hold number designation command setting process, the hold number designation command that specifies that the special figure hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, when the special symbol determination flag setting value = "1", the hold number specification command for specifying that the special figure 2 hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when the special symbol determination flag setting value = "0", the hold number specification command for specifying that the special figure 1 hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S11-5, the special symbol storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which the game information is stored is shifted.
Specifically, when the special symbol determination flag setting value = "1", the storage content of the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area is shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the storage content of the storage area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage content of the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage content of the storage area 4 of the special figure 2 game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 2 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when the special symbol determination flag setting value = "0", the stored contents of the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage content of the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage content of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area is shifted to the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).

In step S11-6, the setting abnormality determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the setting abnormality judgment processing, the occurrence of the setting abnormality is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is acquired. Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired set value is less than a predetermined set comparison value (“6” in this embodiment).
Then, when it is determined that the acquired setting value is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (or more than the predetermined setting comparison value), the value in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 (game machine status flag) is set to the setting abnormal state. Save the corresponding value. In addition, a subcommand that specifies the occurrence of a setting error is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-7).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the acquired set value is less than the predetermined set comparison value, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-7).

In step S11-7, the special figure hit determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special symbol hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special symbol hit determination).
In the special figure hit determination process, first, the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 and the current gaming state (“special figure high probability state” or “special figure low probability state”) are confirmed. , Read the special figure winning lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result.
Then, based on the big hit random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read special figure winning lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a "big hit" (special). Judgment of hitting the figure).
Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table, the special symbol lottery The result of is judged as "big hit" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the read special figure winning lottery table (when it matches the outlier value). ), The result of the special symbol lottery is judged to be "outlier" (lost).

In step S11-8, the special symbol symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (special symbol determination).
Specifically, in the special symbol symbol determination process, first, it is determined whether or not a "big hit" (winning) is determined by the special symbol hit determination.
Then, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the type of "big hit symbol" is determined.
For this, when the special symbol determination flag setting value = "0", the first big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the hit symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read first jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the special symbol determination flag setting value = "1", the second big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the second jackpot symbol lottery table read out.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "missing" (lost) by the special symbol hit determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of the stop symbol.
Next, a value corresponding to the type of the determined stop symbol is set in the special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-9, the symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command for specifying the type of the stop symbol determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-10, the special figure stop symbol number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special symbol stop symbol number determination process, the stop symbol number of the special symbol is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop symbol number lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the hit symbol random number and the stop symbol number (seg data) is registered.
In addition, as a stop symbol number lottery table, a stop symbol number lottery table at the time of winning corresponding to the case where a special symbol lottery (1st special symbol lottery or 2nd special symbol lottery) is won, and a special symbol lottery (1st special symbol lottery) Alternatively, a lottery table for the symbol number to be stopped at the time of the loss corresponding to the case of losing the second special symbol lottery) is stored.
Further, as the winning symbol number lottery table, a winning symbol number lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol lottery and a winning symbol number lottery table corresponding to the second special symbol lottery are stored. ..
In the special figure stop symbol number determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the special symbol hit determination, the special symbol determination flag setting value is confirmed, and the winning symbol number lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read stop symbol number lottery table at the time of winning.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the special figure hit judgment, the stop symbol number lottery table at the time of losing is read. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out stop symbol number lottery table at the time of defeat.
Next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-11, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (type of variation mode and type of variation pattern) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed. Then, when the result of the special figure hit determination is "missing" (loss), the special figure fluctuation state determination process at the time of loss, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination is "big hit" (winning), the special figure variation mode determination process at the time of winning, which will be described later, is executed.

In the special figure change mode determination process at the time of defeat, first, the reach group determination is executed.
In the reach group determination, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
In the reach group determination, first, the hold type (type of game information stored in the storage area 0 (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of holds, and the game state are confirmed. Read the reach group judgment table corresponding to this confirmation result.
Then, the type of the reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read reach group determination table.
Next, in the special figure change mode determination process at the time of defeat, the change mode determination at the time of defeat is executed.
In the variable mode determination at the time of defeat, the variable mode number (type of variable mode) and the variable pattern determination table are determined.
In the defeated variation mode determination, first, the reach group number determined by the reach group determination is confirmed, and the defeated variation mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out variable mode determination table at the time of defeat, the variable mode number (type of variable mode) and the variable pattern determination table , Is determined.
Next, in the special figure change mode determination process at the time of defeat, the variation pattern determination at the time of defeat is executed.
In the determination of the variation pattern at the time of defeat, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined.
In the defeated variation pattern determination, first, the variation pattern determination table determined by the defeated variation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read variation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, in the winning special figure variation mode determination process, first, the winning variation mode determination is executed.
In the winning variation mode determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern table are determined.
In the winning variation mode determination, first, the winning variation mode determination table is read.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read-out winning variation mode determination table, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern determination table , Is determined.
In the winning special figure variation mode determination process, next, the winning variation pattern determination is executed.
In the winning variation pattern determination, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined.
In the winning variation pattern determination, first, the variation pattern determination table determined by the winning variation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 and the read variation pattern determination table.

In step S11-12, the variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-13. In the variation pattern command setting process, the variation mode specification command for specifying the variation mode number (variation mode type) determined in steps S11-11 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
Further, the variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) determined in steps S11-11 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-13, the special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-14. In the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation time setting process, first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation mode number determined in step S11-11 (hereinafter, referred to as “variation time 1”) is acquired.
Further, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number determined in steps S11-11 (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 2”) is acquired.
Then, the total time of the acquired fluctuation time 1 and the fluctuation time 2 is calculated, and the calculated total time is set in the special game timer.

In step S11-14, the special figure variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-15. In the special figure variation display data setting process, data for controlling the variation display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special figure display timer.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", a predetermined initial value is set in the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", a predetermined initial value is set in the special symbol 2 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.

In step S11-15, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure changing state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-16, the customer waiting setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the customer waiting setting process, the demo designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the processing during the change of the special figure.
When the special figure changing process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, first, the process proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure display timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12- When the process proceeds to 3 and it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S12-3, the special figure variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special figure variation display data update process, the data for controlling the variation display of the special figure display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data update process, when the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter.

In step S12-4, the special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display device is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "0", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special symbol 1 display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is lit (stop display).
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value = "1", the acquired stop symbol number (data corresponding to the stop symbol number) is set as the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is lit (stop display).

In step S12-5, the special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.
In step S12-6, the stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the stop specification command setting process, the stop specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the fixed number counter for external information.
In step S12-7, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing while the special figure is stopped)
Next, the special figure stopped processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the processing during the stop of the special figure.
When the special figure stop processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, first, the process proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S13-2 is performed. When the transition is performed and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether or not the type of the stop symbol is "big hit symbol", and if it is determined that the type of the stop symbol is not "big hit symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-3. Then, when it is determined that the type of the stop symbol is "big hit symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-6.
In step S13-3, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is being executed, and if it is determined that the time saving control is being executed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-4 and the time saving control is being executed. If it is determined that this is not the case (No), the process proceeds to step S13-5.
Here, in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, if "1" is set, it is determined that the time saving control is being executed, and if "0" is set, the time saving control is executed. Judge that it is not inside.

In step S13-4, the time saving control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the time saving control management process, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is terminated.
Specifically, in the time reduction control management process, first, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value of the time reduction counter is newly set as the value of the time reduction counter.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0".
Then, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is "0", "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 (the time saving control is stopped).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter is not "0", the state in which "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained (the state in which the time saving control is executed is maintained).
In step S13-5, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-6, the game state update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. Further, "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-7, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-8. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for opening / closing control of the special electric accessory 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a special electric service control table corresponding to each type of "big hit symbol". Then, in each special electric service control table, the large winning opening closing effective time, the large winning opening closing time, the number of round games, the number of opening / closing switching corresponding to each round game, and the control data (solenoid) corresponding to each opening / closing switching are displayed. Control data, control time data), etc. are specified.
In the special electric service control data setting process, the special electric service control table corresponding to the type of the "big hit symbol" determined in step S11-8 is read, and the read special electric service control table is used as the special electric service control table of the RAM 230. Set in the area.
Next, "0" is set in the special electric service continuous operation count counter.

In step S13-8, the opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-9. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-9, the opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command for specifying the type of the "big hit symbol" determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the jackpot count counter for external information.
In step S13-10, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the large winning opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Pre-processing for opening the big prize opening)
Next, the large winning opening pre-opening process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening.
When the large winning opening pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 23, first, the process proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S14-2 is performed. When the transition is performed and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S14-2, the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric service continuous operation counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special electric service continuous operation counter is newly set in the special electric service continuous operation counter.
In step S14-3, the round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start specification command setting process, the round start specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, the special electric service opening / closing switching number setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric service open / close switching count setting process, the open / close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter is read by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. .. Then, the read open / close switching count is set in the special electric service open / close switching counter.
Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric service winning number counter.
In step S14-5, the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Special electric service opening / closing switching process)
Next, the special electric service opening / closing switching process in steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a special electric service opening / closing switching process.
When the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 24, first, the process proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Moves to step S15-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is “0” (Yes), a series of processes is completed and the next process (step S14-6) is completed. Or move to S16-4).

In step S15-2, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 53a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control data setting process, the solenoid corresponding to the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data for designating energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the special electric accessory solenoid 65 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S15-3, the special electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric service control time setting process, the control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the time. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, the special electric service open / close switching count counter update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric service opening / closing switching counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is newly set in the special electric service opening / closing switching counter.

(Large winning opening opening control process)
Next, the large winning opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening control process.
When the large winning opening opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 25, first, the process proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S16-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0" and it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Goes to step S16-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), it goes to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, the special electric service opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 24) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment), and the value of the special electric service winning number counter is predetermined. When it is determined that the upper limit value of (Yes) has been reached, the process proceeds to step S16-5, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S16-5, the process of ending the large winning opening control is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the large winning opening opening control end process, the solenoid control data that specifies the stop of energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S16-6, the large winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the special electric service control table is referred to in the large winning opening closing effective time setting process, and the predetermined large winning opening closing effective time (interval time) is set to the special game timer. Set to.
In step S16-7, the round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end specification command setting process, the round end specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening closed effective state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Effective processing to close the winning opening)
Next, the large winning opening closing effective processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening closing effective process.
When the large winning opening closing effective process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, first, the process proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S17-2 is performed. When the transition is performed and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S17-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter has reached the specified value, and it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No). ), The process proceeds to step S17-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the number of round games specified in the special electric service control table is acquired as a specified value and a determination is made. ..
In step S17-3, the large winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the big winning opening closing time setting process, a predetermined big winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-4, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the large winning opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-5, the ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-6, the ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending specification command setting process, the ending specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening end wait state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Wait processing for the end of opening the big prize opening)
Next, the large winning opening opening end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a wait process for opening the opening of the large winning opening.
When the large winning opening opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 27, first, the process proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S18-2 is performed. When the transition is performed and it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S18-2, the game state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game state setting process, the game state is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, the value of the special figure high probability state flag of the RAM 230 is set according to the type of the stop symbol (big hit symbol).
At this time, when the type of the stop symbol is "big hit 1 symbol" or "big hit 3 symbol" to "big hit 5 symbol", "1" is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, when the type of the stop symbol is "big hit 2 symbols" or "big hit 6 symbols", "0" is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, a predetermined number of time reductions is set in the time reduction counter. At this time, when the type of the stop symbol is "big hit 2 symbols" or "big hit 6 symbols", 100 [times] is set as the predetermined number of time reductions. On the other hand, when the type of the stop symbol is "1 jackpot symbol" or "3 jackpot symbols" to "5 jackpot symbols", 10000 [times] is set as the predetermined number of time reductions. Further, "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, a value corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol is set in the previous jackpot symbol flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S18-3, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal game management process)
Next, the normal game management process of step S4-14 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a normal game management process.
Here, in the present embodiment, as a phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary game phase") of a game (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary game") executed based on the ordinary symbol lottery, "waiting for change in the ordinary figure". "State", "Public figure changing state", "Public figure stop symbol display state", "Public figure electric accessory opening pre-opening state", "Public figure electric accessory opening control state", "Public figure electric accessory closing effective" Seven states are specified: "state" and "normal figure electric accessory opening end wait state".
Then, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
Further, the ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (execution) the normal game.
Then, in the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, first, as shown in FIG. 28, the process proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, the normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, the normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read out.

In step S19-3, the normal game control module execution process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, the process based on the normal game control module read out in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal map fluctuation waiting state", the normal map fluctuation waiting process described later is started and corresponds to the "normal map changing state". If it is a value, the process during the change of the normal figure, which will be described later, is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "display state of the normal figure stop symbol", the process during the stop of the normal figure, which will be described later, is started. When the value corresponds to the "state", the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing described later is started, and when the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory opening control state", the ordinary electric accessory opening control process described later is performed. When it is started and the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory closing effective state", when the normal electric accessory closing effective processing described later is started and the value corresponds to the "ordinary electric accessory opening end wait state". , The normal electric accessory opening end wait process, which will be described later, is started.

(Waiting for fluctuations in the general map)
Next, the normal map fluctuation waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the normal map fluctuation waiting process.
When the normal figure fluctuation waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 29, first, the process proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure hold number counter is "1" or more, and when it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes). , Step S20-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is not "1" or more (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). do.

In step S20-2, the process of updating the number of reserved numbers is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the normal figure hold number update process, the normal figure hold number is updated.
Specifically, in the normal figure hold number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the normal figure hold number counter.
Next, the storage area in which the normal game information is stored is shifted. Specifically, the stored contents of the storage area 1 of the normal map game information storage area are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 2 of the Fuzu game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 1 of the Fuzu game information storage area. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 3 of the Fuzu game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 2 of the Fuzu game information storage area. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 of the Fuzu game information storage area are shifted to the storage area 3 of the Fuzu game information storage area. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 of the Fuzu game information storage area are cleared (initialized).

In step S20-3, the normal figure winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal figure winning judgment process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is judged (normal figure winning judgment).
In the ROM 220, a general drawing winning lottery table in which the winning value of the ordinary symbol lottery is registered is stored. Further, as the normal drawing winning lottery table, a general drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control and a general drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the time saving control being stopped are stored.
In the general drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the time saving control being stopped, the winning value is registered so that the winning probability becomes the first probability (1/99 in this embodiment). On the other hand, in the normal drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control, the winning value is registered so that the winning probability becomes the second probability (1/1 in the present embodiment) higher than the first probability. ing.
Then, in the normal figure winning determination process, the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0, the normal drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the current execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control, and the normal figure winning lottery table. Based on, the normal figure winning judgment is executed.
Specifically, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 matches the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be "winning" (winning).
On the other hand, when the value of the winning random number included in the game information stored in the storage area 0 does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be "missing" (lost).

In step S20-4, the normal figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal symbol stop symbol determination process, the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) of the normal symbol is determined (normal symbol stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop symbol determination process, when the normal symbol winning judgment determines "hit" (winning), the "normal symbol hit symbol" is set as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number). judge.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the normal symbol winning determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stopped symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S20-5, the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination process, the type (variation pattern number) of the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined (normal figure fluctuation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process, when the time saving control is stopped, the first type (2.0 in the present embodiment) is used as the normal map fluctuation pattern type (variation pattern number). The type corresponding to the fluctuation time of [s]) is determined.
On the other hand, when the time reduction control is being executed, the second type (in the present embodiment, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) is used as the type (variation pattern number) of the normal map fluctuation pattern. To judge.

In step S20-6, the normal map fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the normal map fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the normal map fluctuation pattern determined in step S20-6 is acquired. Then, the acquired fluctuation time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, the normal map variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the normal map fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal map variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the normal map display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the normal figure display symbol counter. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the normal figure display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
Next, predetermined seg data is set as the seg data corresponding to the normal map display device. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the set segment data is controlled to be lit.
In step S20-8, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase changing state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing during fluctuation of general map)
Next, the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map.
When the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21- When the process proceeds to 3 and it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S21-3, the normal map variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal map fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal map display device is updated.
Specifically, in the normal map variation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the normal map display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, the normal figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the normal map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, the acquired stop symbol number is set as the value of the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal figure display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit (stop display).
In step S21-5, the normal figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal figure stop symbol display state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing while the normal drawing is stopped)
Next, the process of stopping the normal drawing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the processing during the stoppage of the normal drawing.
When the normal-figure stopped processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 31, first, the process proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S22-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a "normal symbol per symbol", and if it is determined that the stop symbol is not a "normal symbol per symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. Then, when it is determined (Yes) that the stop symbol is a “normal symbol per symbol”, the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal map fluctuation waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-4, the ordinary electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric accessory control data setting process, control data for opening / closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal electric service control table corresponding to the execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control. Then, in each ordinary electric service control table, the time before the ordinary electric service is opened, the normal electric service closing effective time, the opening end wait time, the number of times of opening / closing switching, and the control data (solenoid control data, control time) corresponding to each opening / closing switching are displayed. Data) etc. are specified.
In the normal electric service control data setting process, the normal electric service control table corresponding to the execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control is read, and the read normal electric service control table is stored in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Set.
Next, the number of times of switching between opening and closing is read out with reference to the ordinary electric service control table set in the ordinary electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read open / close switching count is set in the normal electric service open / close switching counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter.

In step S22-5, the time setting process before opening the normal electric service is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal electric service opening time setting process, a predetermined normal electric service opening time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory opening state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric accessory opening pretreatment)
Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening pretreatment executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process of the ordinary electric accessory.
When the normal electric accessory opening pretreatment is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 32, first, the process proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S23-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release control state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric service opening / closing switching process)
Next, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a normal electric service opening / closing switching process.
When the normal electric service opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, first, as shown in FIG. 33, the process proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Moves to step S24-2, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is "0" (Yes), a series of processes is completed and the next process (step S23-3). Or move to S25-4).
In step S24-2, the normal electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the ordinary electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the ordinary electric accessory 52a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control data setting process, the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data for designating energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the ordinary electric accessory 52a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S24-3, the normal electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric service control time setting process, the control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the time. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, the normal electric service open / close switching count counter update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is newly set in the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter.

(Normal electric accessory release control process)
Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening control process.
When the ordinary electric accessory opening control process is executed in step S19-3, first, as shown in FIG. 34, the process proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S25-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0" and it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Steps to step S25-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching count counter is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 33) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (3 [balls] in this embodiment), and the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter is predetermined. When it is determined that the upper limit value of (Yes) has been reached, the process proceeds to step S25-5, and when it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, the normal electric service release control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric service release control end process, the solenoid control data that specifies the stop of energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the normally electric accessory 52a is controlled to be in the closed state.
In step S25-6, the normal electric service closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the ordinary electric service closing effective time setting process, a predetermined ordinary electric service closing effective time is set in the ordinary game timer with reference to the ordinary electric service control table set in the ordinary electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory closed effective state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric accessory closure effective processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory closing effective process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an ordinary electric accessory closing effective process.
When the normal electric accessory closing effective process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, first, the process proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S26-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, the opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the release end wait time setting process, a predetermined release end wait time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S26-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release end wait state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric accessory opening end weight processing)
Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening end wait process.
When the normal electric accessory opening end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 36, first, the process proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S27-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal map fluctuation waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Performance display device control processing)
Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the performance display device control process.
The performance display device control process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. That is, the performance display device control process is a process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, the process proceeds to step S38-1 as shown in FIG. 37.
In step S38-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register save processing, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area. In addition, all the stack pointer values used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether or not the game-enabled state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, the game is played. Judge that the possible state has not occurred.
In step S38-3, the total outcounter addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not added.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not it is in a predetermined gaming state, and if it is determined that it is in a predetermined gaming state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5 and it is determined that it is not in a predetermined gaming state. If (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined game state" is a game state in which the "special figure low probability state" has occurred, the time saving control is stopped, and the jackpot game state has not occurred. ..
In step S38-5, the normal outcounter addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected, "1" is usually added to the value of the out counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the out counter is not normally added.

In step S38-6, the normal prize ball counter addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the first start port 51 is added to the value of the normal prize ball counter. Add "3". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52 is added to the value of the normal prize ball counter. Add "1". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the right winning opening switch 105 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the right winning opening switch 105 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the right other winning opening 54. "Is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the right winning opening switch 105 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the left winning opening switch 106 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning opening switch 106 is detected, the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the left other winning opening 55 to 57 is added to the value of the normal prize ball counter. Add "10". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning opening switch 106 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38-8. If it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value = 60000 × n (n = integer). Note that "n" is a value indicating the current section, and "1" is set as an initial value.
In step S38-8, the section update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to the base value buffer 2 of the RAM 230.
Next, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal out counter. Further, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the normal prize ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current section. As a result, the reference value is updated.
In step S38-9, the base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal prize ball counter. Then, the calculated base ratio is stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230.
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal prize ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

In step S38-10, the base ratio display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, the display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with an identification segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, which of the base ratio of the current section and the base ratio of the previous section is to be displayed is selected.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, the information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and the information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set. Set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. The display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to. The display data corresponding to the ones digit is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the characters "b" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the characters "b" are displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the current characters "b" are displayed by the LEDs 49 to LED56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and LEDs 57 to LED64 display a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio.

On the other hand, when the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, the information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and the information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set. Set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data (8 bits) of "c" is set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. The display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to. The display data corresponding to the ones digit is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the characters "b" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the character "c" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the current characters "c" are displayed by the LEDs 49 to LED56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and LEDs 57 to LED64 display a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio.

In step S38-11, the register return process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register return processing, the register value saved in step S38-1 (the value of the register used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the register value in step S38-1. The saved stack pointer value (value of the stack pointer used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the saved stack pointer value are restored.
In step S38-12, interrupt enable processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-26). In the interrupt enable processing, the interrupt disable state is canceled. As a result, execution of save processing when the power is cut off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Various effects performed on pachinko machine 1)
Next, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

(Hold production)
First, the hold effect (hold display) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, each game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) stored in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area and special figure 2 game information storage area) is targeted. The hold effect is executed.
The hold effect is that the notification display (start determination) of the special symbol based on the game information (hereinafter referred to as "hold effect target game information") that is the target of the hold effect is suspended, or the hold effect. It is an effect that suggests (notifies) that the notification display of the special symbol based on the target game information is being executed.
In the hold effect, the hold symbol h corresponding to the game information subject to the hold effect is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 to b3.

Specifically, in the reserved symbol display area b2, as display positions (display units) on which the reserved symbol h is displayed, there are four storage areas (storage areas 1 to 4) of the special figure 1 game information storage area. The display position corresponding to each is specified.
Further, the reserved symbol display area b3 corresponds to each of the four storage areas (storage areas 1 to 4) of the special figure 2 game information storage area as display positions (display units) on which the reserved symbol h is displayed. The display position to be displayed is specified.
Then, in the hold effect in which the special figure 1 game information is the target game information for the hold effect, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target game information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 and b2.

That is, during the period in which the reserved production target game information is stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) (after the reservation of the reserved production target game information is acquired, the start based on the reserved production target game information is started. During the period before the execution of the determination), the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b2.
At this time, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) in which the reserved effect target game information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period in which the hold effect target game information is stored in the storage area 0 (the period from the execution of the start determination based on the hold effect target game information to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the hold effect target game information. In the middle), the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1.
On the other hand, in the hold effect in which the special figure 2 game information is the hold effect target game information, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target game information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 and b3.
That is, during the period in which the reserved production target game information is stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) (after the reservation of the reserved production target game information is acquired, the start based on the reserved production target game information is started. During the period before the execution of the determination), the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b3.
At this time, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) in which the reserved effect target game information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period in which the hold effect target game information is stored in the storage area 0 (the period from the execution of the start determination based on the hold effect target game information to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the hold effect target game information. In the middle), the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1.

For example, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored as special figure 1 game information in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area, and a hold effect targeting the special figure 1 game information is executed. If so, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 of the reserved symbol display area b2 according to the start of the reserved effect.
After that, according to the shift of the storage area for storing the reserved effect target game information from the storage area 3 to the storage area 2, the display area of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is the storage area 3. The display position corresponding to is shifted to the display position corresponding to the storage area 2.
Further, in response to the shift of the storage area for storing the reserved effect target game information from the storage area 2 to the storage area 1, the display area of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is the storage area 2. The display position corresponding to is shifted to the display position corresponding to the storage area 1.
Further, when the storage area for storing the reserved effect target game information is shifted from the special figure 1 game information storage area (storage area 1) to the storage area 0, the reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is obtained. The display area of h is shifted from the reserved symbol display area b2 (display position corresponding to the storage area 1) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
Then, in response to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the reserved effect target game information, the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information in the reserved symbol display area b1 is terminated, thereby ending the reserved effect. do.

In the present embodiment, as the types of the hold effect, a normal hold effect and a hold notice effect are defined.
The "normal hold effect" is a type of hold effect that does not suggest the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the game information subject to the hold effect.
In the present embodiment, as the type (aspect) of the reserved symbol h, a normal hold and a special hold are defined.
In the normal hold effect, the normal hold is displayed as the hold symbol h corresponding to the game information subject to the hold effect.
In the normal hold effect, the game information subject to the hold effect (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is stored in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area). It starts according to the above, and ends according to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on the reserved effect target game information.

(Hold notice production)
"Hold notice production" is a kind of look-ahead notice production. That is, the hold notice effect is a type of hold effect that suggests the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the predetermined game information by the mode of the hold symbol h corresponding to the game information.
In the following description, the game information that is the target of the hold notice effect is referred to as the "hold notice target game information". Further, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved advance notice target game information is referred to as "notice target reserved symbol hy".
In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is an effect that suggests the result of the advance special symbol determination (specifically, the possibility of being a "big hit symbol") based on the game information subject to the hold notice.
It should be noted that the hold notice effect may be configured to suggest the result of the advance special figure change pattern determination (specifically, the possibility of "super reach change") based on the game information subject to the hold notice.
In the hold notice effect, a special hold is displayed as the hold symbol hy to be noticed.
In the present embodiment, "blue hold", "green hold", "purple hold", and "red hold" are defined as modes (types) of special hold.
Then, in the hold notice effect, the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy changes, and the result of the preliminary determination based on the hold notice target game information (specifically, depending on the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy that is finally displayed). The possibility that a big hit game state may occur) is suggested.
Here, the jackpot expectation of each aspect of the special hold is "red hold", "purple hold", "green hold", "blue hold" (high jackpot expectation → jackpot expectation) in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation. It is stipulated to be low).
The "big hit expectation degree" means the possibility (degree) that a big hit gaming state occurs when the aspect is selected.

When the hold notice effect is executed, one or more hold change triggers and the hold change contents corresponding to each hold change trigger are set. Then, in the hold notice effect, the mode of the hold symbol hy to be announced changes according to the hold change content corresponding to the hold change trigger each time.
The “holding change trigger” is a trigger for changing the mode of the reserved symbol hy to be notified. In addition, the "pending change content" is a content in which the mode of the reserved symbol hy subject to advance notice is changed.
In the present embodiment, as the hold change trigger, the start time of the variable effect corresponding to each advance hold information, the start time of the variable effect corresponding to the game information subject to the hold notice, and the like are defined. Then, when the hold notice effect is executed, one or a plurality of hold change triggers are set from among these hold change triggers.
In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is executed only for the special figure 1 game information among the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information.

(Variation production)
Next, the variation effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the following description, the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a1 is referred to as a “left symbol”, and the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a2 is referred to as a “middle symbol”. , The first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a3 is referred to as a “right symbol”.
In the present embodiment, the second effect symbol z2 is variably displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 at all times during the execution of the variation effect (first half variation effect and second half variation effect).

First, each aspect of the first half variation effect will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation mode numbers are the fluctuation mode number corresponding to "pseudo-reamless fluctuation", the fluctuation mode number corresponding to "pseudo-ream 2 fluctuation", and the fluctuation mode number corresponding to "pseudo-ream 3 fluctuation". And are stipulated.
Further, as the category (type) of the first half variable effect, "pseudo-reamless variable effect", "pseudo-ream 2 variable effect", and "pseudo-ream 3 variable effect" are defined.
Further, as a pattern (aspect) belonging to each category of the first half variable effect, one pattern or a plurality of patterns having different effect contents are defined.
Then, when the variation mode number corresponding to the "pseudo-continuous variation" is specified by the variation mode designation command, the "pseudo-continuous variation effect" is selected as the category of the first half variation effect. On the other hand, when the variation mode number corresponding to the "pseudo-ream 2 variation" is specified by the variation mode designation command, the "pseudo-ream 2 variation effect" is selected as the category of the first half variation effect. On the other hand, when the variation mode number corresponding to the "pseudo-ream 3 variation" is specified by the variation mode designation command, the "pseudo-ream 3 variation effect" is selected as the category of the first half variation effect.

The "pseudo-continuous variation effect" is configured to include a display effect of the content in which the normal variation display of the first special symbol z1 is executed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3.
The "normal variation display" is a display in which the types of the first effect symbol z1 displayed at the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 are sequentially replaced at a constant tempo.
The "lottery result display position" is a position where the first effect symbol z1 is stopped and displayed in the stop effect.
Specifically, in the "pseudo-continuous variation effect", the normal variation display of each symbol is started in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol.

In the "pseudo-continuous variation effect"("pseudo-ream 2 variation effect" / "pseudo-ream 3 variation effect"), the variation display of the first effect symbol z1 is pseudo during the execution of the variation display of one special symbol. In addition, it is a production of contents that are executed multiple times. Specifically, the pseudo-continuous variation effect is configured to include a plurality of pseudo-variation effects.
Here, the "pseudo-ream two-variation effect" is configured to include two pseudo-variation effects. On the other hand, the "pseudo-ream three-variation effect" is configured to include three pseudo-variation effects.
In each pseudo variation effect, the temporary stop display of the first effect symbol z1 is executed after the normal variation display of the first special symbol z1 is executed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. It is composed including the display effect of the contents.
The "temporary stop display" is a pseudo stop display. Specifically, the temporary stop display is a display in which one type of first effect symbol z1 stays in a predetermined mode (swing, rotation, etc.) at the lottery result display position.
The "stop display" is a display in which one type of first effect symbol z1 stays in a stopped state at the lottery result display position.
Specifically, in each pseudo-variation effect, after the normal variation display of each symbol is started in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, the temporary stop of each symbol is performed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. The display is executed.
In particular, in each pseudo-variation effect, the combination of the first effect symbol z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the "missing eye", "reach eye", and "chance eye". Of these, either combination will be used. Here, in the final pseudo-variation effect, the combination of the first effect symbols z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 becomes the "reach eye", and the reach state is established.
The "outside stitch" is a combination that is not included in the "big hit symbol" (specifically, a combination in which the types of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are not aligned) (excluding the specific combination described later).
The "reach eyes" are combinations included in the "big hit symbol" (specifically, a combination in which the types of the left symbol and the right symbol are aligned).
The "chance eye" is a specific combination (for example, "1, 2, 2," among the combinations not included in the "big hit symbol" (specifically, the combinations in which the types of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are not aligned). It is a combination with regularity such as "3").
In the "reach state", the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the two first effect symbol display areas of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. The combination of the effect symbol z1 is in a state of being included in the "big hit symbol".

Next, each aspect of the latter half variation effect will be described.
In pachinko machine 1, as fluctuation pattern numbers, a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "no reach fluctuation", a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation", and a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" are defined. Has been done.
Further, as the category (type) of the latter half variation effect, "variation effect without reach", "normal reach variation effect", and "super reach variation effect" are defined.
Further, as a pattern (aspect) belonging to each category of the latter half variation effect, one pattern or a plurality of patterns having different effect contents are defined.
Then, when the variation pattern number corresponding to "variation without reach" is specified by the variation pattern specification command, "variation without reach" is selected as the category of the latter half variation effect. On the other hand, when the variation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach variation" is specified by the variation pattern specification command, "normal reach variation effect" is selected as the category of the latter half variation effect. On the other hand, when the variation pattern number corresponding to "super reach variation" is specified by the variation pattern specification command, "super reach variation effect" is selected as the category of the latter half variation effect.

The "variable effect without reach" is an effect that is executed following the "variable effect without pseudo-ream".
In the present embodiment, as the "variation effect without reach", the "variation effect without reach (missing)" executed when the result of the special figure hit determination is "missing" and the result of the special figure hit determination are "big hits". It is stipulated that "variable effect without reach (big hit)" to be executed in the case of "".
The "variable effect without reach"("variable effect without reach (off)" and "variable effect without reach (big hit)") is the first special symbol z1 in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. It is configured to include a display effect of the content that is normally executed as a variable display.
Specifically, in the "variation effect without reach", after the normal variation display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is executed, each symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol.
At this time, in the "variable effect without reach (disappearance)", the combination of the first effect symbols z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 becomes the "disappearance symbol".
On the other hand, in the "variable effect without reach (big hit)", the combination of the first effect symbols z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 becomes the "big hit symbol".

The "normal reach variation effect" is an effect executed following the "pseudo continuous variation effect"("pseudo-ream 2 variation effect" / "pseudo-ream 3 variation effect").
In the present embodiment, as the "normal reach variation effect", the "normal reach variation effect (missing)" executed when the result of the special figure hit determination is "missing" and the result of the special figure hit determination are "big hit". "Normal reach fluctuation effect (big hit)" to be executed in a certain case is stipulated.
The "normal reach fluctuation effect"("normal reach variation effect (off)" and "normal reach variation effect (big hit)") is an effect executed during the formation of the reach state, and whether or not the "big hit symbol" is established. It is configured to include a display effect of the content that the "big hit symbol" is not established or the "big hit symbol" is established after the fanning.
Specifically, in the "normal reach variation effect", the middle symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the reach effect image is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state.
At this time, in the "normal reach fluctuation effect (off)", a medium symbol of a type different from the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (the "big hit symbol" is not established).
On the other hand, in the "normal reach fluctuation effect (big hit)", the middle symbol of the same type as the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (the "big hit symbol" is established).
The "reach effect image" is an effect image with contents that encourage the temporary stop display of the same type of medium symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol (the "big hit symbol" is established). In the present embodiment, as the reach effect image, an image in which the character included in the middle symbol performs a predetermined action and an image in which a predetermined effect is applied to the middle symbol are displayed.

The "super reach variation effect" is an effect executed following the "pseudo continuous variation effect"("pseudo-ream 2 variation effect" / "pseudo-ream 3 variation effect").
In the present embodiment, as the "super reach variation effect", the "super reach variation effect (missing)" executed when the result of the special figure hit determination is "missing" and the result of the special figure hit determination are "big hits". "Super reach fluctuation effect (big hit)" that is executed when "" is specified.
"Super reach fluctuation effect"("Super reach variation effect (off)", "Super reach variation effect (big hit)") is an effect executed during the formation of the reach state, and the "big hit symbol" is established. After inciting whether or not, the display of the content that avoids the establishment of the "big hit symbol" is executed, then the variable display of the middle symbol is restarted, and then the content that develops from the reach state to the development reach state is displayed. Is executed, and after inciting whether or not the "big hit symbol" is established again, the display effect of the content that the "big hit symbol" is not established or the "big hit symbol" is established is included.
The "development reach state" is a state in which the two first special symbols z1 forming the reach state are reduced and displayed. In the present embodiment, the left symbol and the right symbol forming the reach state are reduced and displayed on the upper end portion of the display screen 31a, whereby the developed reach state is formed. During the period when the development reach state is formed, the middle symbols will be hidden.
Specifically, in the "super reach variation effect", after the above reach effect image is displayed during the period when the left symbol and the right symbol form the reach state, among the types different from the left symbol and the right symbol. The symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, then the variable display of the middle symbol is resumed, and then the development reach state is formed, and during the period when the development reach state is formed, after the development reach effect image is displayed, the middle The symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.
At this time, in the "super reach fluctuation effect (off)", a medium symbol of a type different from the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (the "big hit symbol" is not established).
On the other hand, in the "super reach fluctuation effect (big hit)", the middle symbol of the same type as the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (the "big hit symbol" is established).
The "development reach production image" is a production image with contents that encourage the temporary stop display of the same type of medium symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol (the "big hit symbol" is established). In the present embodiment, a predetermined background image is displayed as the development reach effect image.

(Main notice production)
Next, the main notice effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "main notice effect" is an effect executed during the variation effect, and is an effect that suggests the result of the start determination (special figure hit determination, special symbol symbol determination, special figure variation pattern determination, etc.) related to the variation effect. It has become.
In the present embodiment, the main notice effect suggests the result of the special symbol determination (specifically, the possibility of being a "big hit symbol").
In the present embodiment, as the type of the main notice effect, a plurality of types having different effect contents are defined.

(Stop production)
Next, the stop effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "stop effect" is an effect executed while the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
In the stop effect, the first effect symbol z1 is stopped and displayed in each of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second effect symbol z2 is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. ..

(Big hit production)
Next, the jackpot effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The jackpot effect is an effect that is executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state.
In the pachinko machine 1, "big hit effect 1" to "big hit effect 6" are defined as categories (types) of the big hit effect.
Further, as a pattern (aspect) belonging to each category of the jackpot effect, one pattern or a plurality of patterns having different effect contents are defined.
Then, when the stop symbol number corresponding to the "big hit 1 symbol" is specified by the opening designation command, "big hit effect 1" is selected as the category of the big hit effect. On the other hand, when the stop symbol number corresponding to the "big hit 2 symbol" is specified by the opening designation command, "big hit effect 2" is selected as the category of the big hit effect. When the stop symbol number corresponding to the "big hit 3 symbols" is specified by the opening designation command, "big hit effect 3" is selected as the category of the big hit effect. When the stop symbol number corresponding to the "big hit 4 symbols" is specified by the opening designation command, "big hit effect 4" is selected as the category of the big hit effect. When the stop symbol number corresponding to the "big hit 5 symbols" is specified by the opening designation command, "big hit effect 5" is selected as the category of the big hit effect. When the stop symbol number corresponding to the "big hit 6 symbols" is specified by the opening designation command, "big hit effect 6" is selected as the category of the jackpot effect.

The jackpot effect is composed of an opening effect executed during the opening period, an interval effect executed during the interval period, a round effect executed during the round game, an ending effect executed during the ending period, and the like. There is.
The "opening period" is the period from the start of the jackpot game state to the elapse of the opening time.
The "interval period" is the period from the end of the opening period to the start of the first round game, or the period from the end of each round game to the start of the next round game.
The ending period is the period from the end of the interval period after the end of the final round game to the elapse of the ending time.

(Processing executed on the effect control board 300)
Next, the process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
In the present embodiment, the command reception interrupt processing, the subtimer interrupt processing, and the movable body interrupt processing, which will be described later, are interrupt processing executed by the interrupt handler. On the other hand, the Vsync interrupt processing, the sound interrupt processing, and the lamp interrupt processing, which will be described later, are interrupt processing (tasks) that can be executed in parallel at the same time by multitasking.
Here, Vsync interrupt processing, sound interrupt processing, and lamp interrupt processing may also be configured as interrupt processing executed by the interrupt handler.

(Sub CPU initialization process)
First, the sub CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the sub CPU initialization process.
A reset circuit (not shown) is provided on the effect control board 300. The reset circuit generates a reset signal when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts the sub CPU initialization process shown in FIG. 38 in response to the generation of the reset signal by the reset circuit.
When the sub CPU initialization process is started, the process first proceeds to step S28-1.
In step S28-1, the initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-2. In the initial setting process, various initial settings required to start the effect control are executed.
Specifically, in the initialization process, the CPU 310 is initialized by initializing various registers, various timers, and the like used by the CPU 310.
Further, in the initialization process, various internal devices (CPU work memory 311, CPU interface 312, host interface 313, CG bus interface 314, DRAM interface 315, VRAM 316, serial communication controller 317, transfer circuit 318, preloader circuit 319, The display circuit 320, the graphics decoder circuit 321 and the drawing circuit 322, the sound circuit 323, etc.) are initialized.
In particular, at this time, the value of the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register is initialized. As a result, a value (specifically, “0”) that specifies the “normal / post-effector frequency correction parameter” is set in the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register. As a result, after that, in the post-effector 360, frequency correction is executed for the audio data of each channel according to the "normal time / post-effector frequency correction parameter".
Further, in the initialization process, various external devices (control ROM 302, CGROM 303, DRAM 304, etc.) are initialized. At this time, a value (“0” in the present embodiment) that specifies a state in which the initial transfer, which will be described later, has not been completed, is set in the initial transfer completion flag area of the DRAM 304. Further, a value (specifically, "0") for designating the "normal time / frequency correction parameter" in each frequency correction parameter number setting area (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter number setting area 3) of the DRAM 304. ") Is set.

In step S28-2, the initial transfer data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3. In the initial transfer data setting process, information that specifies the data to be the initial transfer is set.
Specifically, in the initial transfer data setting process, the initial transfer data list is set in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304, and a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the data transfer counter. ..
The "initial transfer data list" is a list of data to be transferred (preloaded) from the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304 when the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, in the initial transfer data list, all the compressed audio data among the data stored in the CGROM 303 is defined as the data to be transferred.
Specifically, in the initial transfer data list, for all the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303, information for designating the address of the storage area (storage area of the CGROM 303) for reading each compressed audio data (hereinafter, "read address"". ), Information that specifies the address of the storage area (storage area of DRAM 304) for writing the compressed audio data (hereinafter referred to as "write address"), and information that specifies the order in which the compressed audio data is transferred. (Specifically, the value of the data transfer counter) and the correspondence are registered.

In step S28-3, the digital amplifier setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4. In the digital amplifier setting process, the digital amplifier 305 is initially set.
Specifically, in the digital amplifier setting process, first, a reset signal is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305 (the signal input to the reset terminal is turned on). As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, various registers (frequency correction parameter setting register (frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, frequency correction parameter setting unit 3), volume setting (correction) register, Registers related to terminal settings, status information setting registers, etc.) are initialized (cleared). At this time, a value (specifically, "0") corresponding to the normal state is set in the status information setting register.
In the digital amplifier setting process, next, the "normal time / frequency correction parameter"("normal time / frequency correction parameter 1" to "normal time / frequency correction parameter 3") is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305.
As a result, the "normal time / frequency correction parameter" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting register of the digital amplifier 305. That is, "normal time / frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3. Normal time / frequency correction parameter 3 ”is set.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, frequency correction is executed for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker / upper right speaker) according to "normal time / frequency correction parameter 1", and "normal time / frequency correction parameter" is executed. According to "2", frequency correction is performed for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (middle left speaker and middle right speaker), and according to "normal time / frequency correction parameter 3", the frequency for the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) is corrected. The correction is performed.

In step S28-4, interrupt enable processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-5. In the interrupt enable processing, the interrupt disable state is canceled. This makes it possible (permitted) to execute various types of interrupt processing.
In step S28-5, the random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-6. In the random number update process, various random numbers for production are updated.
In step S28-6, the initial transfer process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-7. The initial transfer process will be described later.

In step S28-7, the status acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-8. In the status information acquisition process, the status information set in the status information setting register of the digital amplifier 305 is acquired.
In step S28-8, it is determined whether or not the status information acquired in step S28-7 is a value corresponding to the abnormal state (specifically, "1"), and the acquired status information corresponds to the abnormal state. If it is determined that the value is (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-9, and it is determined that the acquired status information is not a value corresponding to the abnormal state (a value corresponding to the normal state) (No). ), The process proceeds to step S28-5.
In step S28-9, the digital amplifier reset process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-10. In the digital amplifier reset process, a reset signal is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305 (the signal input to the reset terminal of the digital amplifier 305 is turned on).
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, various registers (frequency correction parameter setting register (frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, frequency correction parameter setting unit 3), volume setting (correction) register, Registers related to terminal settings, status information setting registers, etc.) are initialized (cleared). At this time, a value (specifically, "0") corresponding to the normal state is set in the status information setting register.

In step S28-10, the parameter return process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-5. In the parameter recovery process, the value of the frequency correction parameter setting register of the digital amplifier 305 is recovered based on the value set in the frequency correction parameter number setting area of the DRAM 304.
Specifically, in the parameter recovery process, first, the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 of the DRAM 304 is confirmed. Then, the frequency correction parameter corresponding to the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 is read from the control ROM 302, and the read frequency correction parameter is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305.
Next, the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 of the DRAM 304 is confirmed. Then, the frequency correction parameter corresponding to the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 is read from the control ROM 302, and the read frequency correction parameter is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305.
Next, the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 of the DRAM 304 is confirmed. Then, the frequency correction parameter corresponding to the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 is read from the control ROM 302, and the read frequency correction parameter is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305.

As a result, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 is "0", the "normal time / frequency correction parameter 1" is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305, and the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1 "normally". The time / frequency correction parameter 1 ”is restored. On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 is "1", the "big hit / frequency correction parameter 1" is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305, and the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1 "at the big hit". -Frequency correction parameter 1 "is restored. On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 is "2", the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 1" is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305, and the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1 "time reduction time". -Frequency correction parameter 1 "is restored.
When the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 is "0", the "normal time / frequency correction parameter 2" is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305, and the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2 "normal time". -Frequency correction parameter 2 "is restored. On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 is "1", the "big hit / frequency correction parameter 2" is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305, and the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2 "at the big hit". -Frequency correction parameter 2 "is restored. On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 is "2", the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 2" is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305, and the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2 performs the "time reduction / time reduction". -Frequency correction parameter 2 "is restored.
When the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 is "0", the "normal time / frequency correction parameter 3" is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305, and the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3 "normal time". -Frequency correction parameter 3 "is restored. On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 is "1", the "big hit / frequency correction parameter 3" is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305, and the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3 "at the big hit". -Frequency correction parameter 3 "is restored. On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 is "2", the "time reduction / frequency correction parameter 3" is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305, and the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3 "time reduction time". -Frequency correction parameter 3 "is restored.

(Initial transfer processing)
Next, the initial transfer process in step S28-5 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the initial transfer process.
When the initial transfer process is executed in step S28-5, the process proceeds to step S44-1 as shown in FIG. 39.
In step S44-1, it is determined whether or not the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1", and the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is not "1"("0"). If it is determined (No), the process proceeds to step S44-2, and if it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is “1” (Yes), a series of series is performed. The process is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-4).

In step S44-2, the SATA transfer process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-3. In the SATA transfer process, the data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred (preloaded) to the preload area of the DRAM 304 according to the initial transfer data list set in step S28-1.
Specifically, in the SATA transfer process, first, the value of the data transfer counter is confirmed. Next, the read address and the write address corresponding to the confirmed value of the data transfer counter are acquired by referring to the initial transfer data list. Then, the data (compressed audio data) stored in the storage area specified by the acquired read data address is read, and the read data (compressed image data) is stored in the storage area specified by the acquired write address. Remember.
In the SATA transfer process, next, "1" is added to the value of the data transfer counter.

In step S44-3, it is determined whether or not the initial transfer is completed, and if it is determined that the initial transfer is completed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S44-4 and it is determined that the initial transfer is not completed. If (No), the series of processes is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-4).
Here, in step S44-3, it is determined whether or not the transfer of all the data registered in the initial transfer data list is completed based on the value of the data transfer counter. Then, when it is determined that the transfer of all the data registered in the initial transfer data list is completed, it is determined that the initial transfer is completed, and the transfer of all the data registered in the initial transfer data list is completed. If it is determined that the initial transfer has not been completed, it is determined that the initial transfer has not been completed.
In step S44-4, the initial transfer completion flag setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-3). In the initial transfer completion flag setting process, a value (“1” in the present embodiment) that specifies the state in which the initial transfer is completed is set in the initial transfer completion flag area.

As described above, during the period from the execution of the initial setting process to the completion of the transfer (initial transfer) of all the data (all the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303) registered in the initial transfer data list, the initial period. "0" is set in the transfer completion flag area. Then, during the period in which "0" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area, the SATA transfer process of step S44-2 is repeatedly executed.
After that, in response to the completion of the transfer (initial transfer) of all the data (all the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303) registered in the initial transfer data list, "1" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area. Is set.
In particular, in the present embodiment, control of audio output by various speakers 22 (audio output processing by sound circuit 323) and various image display devices 31 according to the setting of “1” in the initial transfer completion flag area. , 32 to control the display of the effect image (drawing process by VDP), and a state in which it is possible to execute the operation occurs.
That is, when "0" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area, the audio output control by the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound circuit 323) and the display of the effect images by the various image display devices 31 and 32. It becomes impossible to execute the control (drawing process by VDP).
On the other hand, when "1" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area, the audio output control by the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound circuit 323) and the display of the effect images by the various image display devices 31 and 32. (Drawing process by VDP) and can be executed.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, before the transfer of all the data (all the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303) registered in the initial transfer data list is completed ("1" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area. (Before setting), control of drive (light emission) of various lamps 20 and 21 (lamp drive process by lamp controller 317a) and control of drive of various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive process by motor controller 317b). ) And, a state occurs in which it is possible to execute.
That is, after the initial setting process is executed, the drive (light emission) control of the various lamps 20 and 21 (lamp drive process by the lamp controller 317a) and various types are performed according to the permission to execute various interrupt processes. A state is generated in which it is possible to control the drive of the motor 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive process by the motor controller 317b).

(Command reception interrupt processing)
Next, the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 executes a command reception interrupt process (not shown) in response to receiving a control command from the main control board 200.
In the command reception interrupt process, the control command received from the main control board 200 is stored (stored) in the reception buffer area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300.

(Subtimer interrupt processing)
Next, the subtimer interrupt process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing subtimer interrupt processing.
The effect control board 300 is configured to include a clock generation circuit. The clock generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal at predetermined intervals.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts the sub-timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock generation circuit. When the subtimer interrupt processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register save process, the register value is saved in the save area of the DRAM 304.

In step S31-2, the timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, the values of various timers (effect scenario timer, etc.) included in the effect control board 300 are updated. Specifically, a predetermined value (a value corresponding to a predetermined cycle) is added or subtracted from the values of various timers.
In step S31-3, the command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control command stored in the receive buffer of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the received control command is executed. The command analysis process will be described later.

In step S31-4, the time schedule management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of the effect is managed based on the effect scenario data set in the effect scenario setting area and the value of the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data.
Specifically, in the time schedule management process, it is determined whether or not there is process data whose start time has come for each effect scenario data set in the effect scenario setting area. Then, when it is determined that the process data whose start time has arrived exists, each command information (message) included in the process data is stored (stored) in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, the command information related to the display effect (command information for designating the start of the display effect, command information for specifying the end of the display effect, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information related to the sound effect (command information for designating the start of the sound effect, etc.) is stored in the sound command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information related to the lamp effect (command information for designating the start of the lamp effect, etc.) is stored in the lamp command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information related to the movable body effect (command information for designating the start of the movable body effect, etc.) is stored in the movable body command buffer area.

In step S31-5, the register reset processing is executed and the subtimer interrupt processing is terminated. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S31-1 is restored.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis process in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, the process proceeds to step S32-1 as shown in FIG. 41.
In step S32-1, the set value command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the set value command reception process, it is determined whether or not the set value specification command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the set value designation command has been received, the value corresponding to the set value designated by the set value designation command is stored (set) in the set value storage area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300.

In step S32-2, the game state command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the game state command reception process, it is determined whether or not the game state specification command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the game state designation command has been received, various effect flags are set.
In step S32-3, the hold command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. The hold command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-4, the look-ahead command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5. The look-ahead command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-5, the variable command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. The variable command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-6, the stop command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7. The stop command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-7, the opening command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-8. The opening command reception process will be described later.

In step S32-8, the game status command reception process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4).
In the game status command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not the game status specification command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the game status designation command has been received, the game status setting process described later is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game status designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4) without executing the game status setting process.
In the game status setting process, the game status specification command is analyzed.
Then, when the generation of the launchable state is specified by the game status specification command, a value (for example, "1") that specifies that the launchable state is being generated in the game status flag area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300. ") Is set. In addition, the effect of suggesting (notifying) that the launchable state is being generated is started.
On the other hand, when the release of the launchable state is specified by the game status specification command, a value (for example, "0") is specified in the game status flag area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 to specify that the launchable state is being released. ") Is set. In addition, the effect of suggesting (notifying) that the launchable state is being generated ends.

(Hold command reception processing)
Next, the hold command reception process in step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the hold command reception process.
When the hold command reception process is executed in step S32-3, the process proceeds to step S36-1 as shown in FIG. 42.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the hold number designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2 and the hold number designation command is executed. If it is determined that the command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the hold number (the hold number has increased by "1"), and the hold number specification command specifies the increase in the hold number. If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and the command for specifying the number of holds does not specify an increase in the number of holds (specifies that the number of holds has decreased by "1"). If it is determined (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, the hold number addition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the hold number addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command specifies whether or not the hold number designation command specifies an increase in the hold number.
Then, when it is determined that the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the special figure 1 hold number, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 1 Set to the hold count counter. In addition, the normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 1 game information is started.
At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved symbol h, of the four display positions included in the reserved symbol display area b2, a storage area (storage area 1 to 1) in which the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is stored. The display position corresponding to the storage area 4) is set. Here, the storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) in which the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number specification command specifies an increase in the special figure 2 hold number, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 2 Set to the hold count counter. In addition, the normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 2 game information is started.
At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved symbol h, a storage area (storage areas 1 to 1) in which newly acquired special figure 2 game information is stored among the four display positions included in the reserved symbol display area b3. The display position corresponding to the storage area 4) is set. Here, the storage area (storage area 1 to storage area 4) in which the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter.

In step S36-4, the hold number subtraction process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the hold number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command specifies the subtraction of the hold number in Special Figure 1.
Then, when it is determined that the hold number specification command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 1 hold number, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 1 Set to the hold count counter. Further, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b2 is shifted (moved).
Specifically, the hold effect corresponding to the hold symbol h displayed in the hold symbol display area b1 is terminated. As a result, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the finished hold effect is finished.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 1 in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is set to the reserved symbol display area b2 (corresponding to the storage area 1). Shift from the display position) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 2 in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 2 to the storage area 1 Shifts to the display position corresponding to.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 to the storage area 2 Shifts to the display position corresponding to.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 4 in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 4 to the storage area 3 Shifts to the display position corresponding to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number specification command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 2 hold number, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 2 Set to the hold count counter. Further, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b3 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the hold effect corresponding to the hold symbol h displayed in the hold symbol display area b1 is terminated. As a result, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the finished hold effect is finished.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 1 in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is set to the reserved symbol display area b3 (corresponding to the storage area 1). Shift from the display position) to the reserved symbol display area b1.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 2 in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 2 to the storage area 1 Shifts to the display position corresponding to.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 3 to the storage area 2 Shifts to the display position corresponding to.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at the display position corresponding to the storage area 4 in the reserved symbol display area b3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the display position corresponding to the storage area 4 to the storage area 3 Shifts to the display position corresponding to.

(Read-ahead command reception processing)
Next, the look-ahead command reception process in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead command reception process.
When the look-ahead command reception process is executed in step S32-4, the process proceeds to step S33-1 as shown in FIG. 43.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead designation command (first look-ahead designation command, second look-ahead designation command, and third look-ahead designation command) has been received, and it is determined that the look-ahead designation command has been received (Yes). ), The process proceeds to step S33-2, and if it is determined that the look-ahead designation command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, the look-ahead information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the look-ahead information analysis process, the information specified by the look-ahead designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 as hold information.
A hold information storage area capable of storing hold information is set in the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300. Further, as the reserved information storage area, the first reserved information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 game information storage area of RAM 230) and the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 game information storage area of RAM 230) ) Corresponds to the second reserved information storage area.
The first reserved information storage area is configured to include storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing reserved information. Then, in the first reserved information storage area, the reserved information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area is stored. That is, the hold information stored in the storage area 1 of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the storage area 2 of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the storage area 3 of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the storage area 4 of the first hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area.
The second reserved information storage area is configured to include storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing reserved information. Then, in the second reserved information storage area, the reserved information corresponding to the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area is stored. That is, the hold information stored in the storage area 1 of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the storage area 2 of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the storage area 3 of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the hold information stored in the storage area 4 of the second hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 2 game information storage area.
Each hold information includes symbol information indicating the type of stopped symbol, first variation information indicating the content of the variation mode (“variation mode number” or “indefinite value”), and the content of the variation pattern (“variation pattern number” or “variation pattern number” or “variation pattern number”). It includes a second variation information indicating "indefinite value").

In the look-ahead information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command (“missing symbol” or “big hit p symbol”). ”), The content of the variation mode specified by the second look-ahead specification command (“variation mode m” or “indefinite value”), and the content of the variation pattern specified by the third look-ahead specification command (“variation pattern n” or “variation pattern n” or “indefinite value”). Indefinite value ”), the symbol information corresponding to the type of stopped symbol analyzed, the first variation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation mode, and the second variation corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation pattern. Generates variability information and pending information including. Then, the generated hold information is stored (stored) in the first hold information storage area.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command (“missing symbol” or “big hit p symbol”). ”), The content of the variation mode specified by the second look-ahead specification command (“variation mode m” or “indefinite value”), and the content of the variation pattern specified by the third look-ahead specification command (“variation pattern n” or “variation pattern n” or “indefinite value”). Indefinite value ”), the symbol information corresponding to the type of stopped symbol analyzed, the first variation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation mode, and the second variation corresponding to the content of the analyzed variation pattern. Generates variability information and pending information including. Then, the generated hold information is stored (stored) in the second hold information storage area.
In the following description, the hold information stored in the hold information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as “look-ahead target hold information”. Further, among the hold information stored in the first hold information storage area, the hold information for which the notification display (variable display and stop display) is executed before the look-ahead target hold information is referred to as "advance hold information".

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the look-ahead notice effect is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4 and the look-ahead notice effect is performed. If it is determined that the process is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, “1” is set in the pre-reading advance notice effect flag area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300 while the pre-reading advance notice effect is being executed. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is being executed based on whether or not "1" is set in the pre-reading notice effect during flag area.
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5, and the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied (No), a series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, (1) the pre-reading target hold information is the hold information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information, and (2) the advance hold information of a predetermined number (“2” in this embodiment) or more is stored. (3) There is no advance hold information indicating the type (variation pattern number) belonging to "normal reach fluctuation" or "super reach fluctuation" as the type of fluctuation pattern, and (4) the time saving control is stopped. It is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied when all the conditions of (5) that the jackpot game state is not occurring are satisfied.
The content of the pre-reading notice effect execution condition can be changed as appropriate. That is, as a configuration in which it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied when one or a plurality of the above conditions (1) to (5) are satisfied instead of all the conditions (1) to (5) above. It doesn't matter. Further, the pre-reading notice effect execution condition may include other conditions different from the above-mentioned conditions (1) to (5).

In step S33-5, the look-ahead notice effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the look-ahead notice effect lottery process, a look-ahead notice effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect is executed.
The control ROM 302 of the effect control board 300 stores a pre-reading notice effect lottery table in which the winning value of the pre-reading advance notice effect lottery is registered.
In the look-ahead notice effect lottery process, first, the hold notice appearance designation information stored in the hold notice appearance designation information setting area is confirmed. Then, when the non-appearance designation information is set in the hold notice appearance designation information setting area, the look-ahead notice effect lottery is not executed (it is determined not to execute the look-ahead notice effect). On the other hand, when the appearance designation information is set in the hold notice appearance designation information setting area, the pre-reading notice effect lottery is executed.
In the look-ahead notice effect lottery, first, a look-ahead notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the acquired look-ahead notice effect lottery random number and the look-ahead notice effect lottery table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect lottery has been won (Yes), step S33-7 is performed. If it is determined that the lottery for the pre-reading notice effect has been lost (No), the series of processes is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step 33-7, the look-ahead advance notice effect setting process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, the content of the look-ahead notice effect (hold notice effect) is set.
Specifically, in the look-ahead notice effect setting process, first, the hold final mode selection process is executed. In the hold final mode selection process, the hold final mode is selected and set.
The “holding final mode” refers to a mode of the notice target hold symbol hy that finally changes in the hold notice effect.
The control ROM 302 of the effect control board 300 stores a hold final color lottery table in which correspondence between the hold final mode lottery random number and the hold final mode is registered.
Further, as the hold final mode lottery table, the hold final mode lottery table corresponding to each type of variation pattern is stored.
In the hold final mode selection process, first, the hold final mode lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the type of variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead target hold information is confirmed, and the hold final mode lottery table corresponding to this check result is read out. Then, the hold final mode is selected (determined) based on the acquired hold final mode lottery random number and the read hold final mode lottery table.

In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, next, the hold change trigger selection process is executed. In the hold change trigger selection process, the hold change trigger is selected and set.
The control ROM 302 of the effect control board 300 stores a hold change trigger lottery table in which correspondence between the hold change trigger lottery random number and the hold change pattern is registered.
The "hold change pattern" is information (scenario data) that specifies a combination of hold change triggers.
Further, as the hold change trigger lottery table, the hold change trigger lottery table corresponding to each combination of the special figure 1 hold number (“2” to “4”) and the hold final mode is stored.
In the hold change trigger selection process, first, a hold change trigger lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the number of reserved final modes in Special Figure 1 and the final reserved mode selected in the final hold mode selection process are confirmed, and the hold change trigger lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, the hold notice effect number is determined (determined) based on the acquired hold change trigger lottery random number and the read hold change trigger lottery table. Then, the effect scenario data corresponding to the determined hold notice effect number is read, and the read effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario area.

In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, the pending change content selection process is then executed. In the pending change content selection process, the pending change content corresponding to each pending change trigger is selected and set.
Specifically, in the hold change content selection process, as the hold change contents corresponding to each hold change trigger, the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy before the change and the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy after the change are displayed. Set.
In the present embodiment, of the one or a plurality of hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger selection process, each hold change trigger is held in order from the hold change trigger (later hold change trigger) that arrives (occurs) later. The pending change content corresponding to the change trigger is selected.
For example, when 3 [times] hold change triggers are set in the hold change trigger selection process, the third (final) hold change trigger, the second hold change trigger, and the first hold change trigger are set in this order. , The content of the pending change corresponding to each pending change trigger is selected.
In addition, when selecting the content of the hold change corresponding to each hold change trigger, first, the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy after the change is selected, and then the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy before the change is selected. Be selected. At this time, as the mode of the notice target reserved symbol hy before the change, a mode having a lower degree of expectation is determined as compared with the mode of the notice target reserved symbol hy after the change. As a result, the mode of the reserved symbol hy to be announced is changed (promoted) to a mode with a high degree of expectation according to the arrival of each hold change trigger.
The control ROM 302 of the effect control board 300 stores a pending change content lottery table in which correspondence between the pending change content lottery random number and the mode of the reserved symbol hy before the change is registered.
Further, as the hold change content lottery table, the hold change content lottery table corresponding to each mode of the hold symbol h (the mode of the hold symbol hy to be notified after the change) is stored.
Then, in the hold change content lottery table corresponding to each aspect of the reserved symbol h (the aspect of the reserved symbol hy to be announced after the change), the reserved symbol hy to be announced after the change is set as the aspect of the reserved symbol hy to be announced before the change. Only the modes with low expectations are registered as compared with the mode of.
In the hold change content selection process, first, among the hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger selection process, the hold change content is selected for the last hold change trigger. To do this, first, the mode of the reserved symbol hy to be announced after the change related to the last inning change trigger is selected. At this time, the hold final mode selected in the hold final mode selection process is selected as the mode of the hold symbol hy to be notified after the change related to the last hold change trigger. Next, the mode of the reserved symbol hy to be announced before the change related to the final pending change trigger is selected. To do this, first, a pending change content lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the lottery table for the content of the pending change corresponding to the mode of the reserved symbol hy to be announced after the change selected for the last inning of the pending change trigger is read. Then, based on the acquired pending change content lottery random number and the read pending change content lottery table, the mode of the reserved symbol hy before the change related to the final pending change trigger is selected.
Next, in the hold change content selection process, among the hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger selection process, the hold change contents are selected for each hold change trigger excluding the last hold change trigger. At this time, the content of the pending change corresponding to each pending change trigger is determined in order from the pending change trigger that arrives later.
In order to determine the content of the pending change corresponding to each pending change trigger, first, the mode of the pending symbol hy to be notified after the change related to the pending change trigger is determined. At this time, as the mode of the notice target reserved symbol hy after the change related to the current hold change trigger, the mode of the notice target reserved symbol hy before the change that has already been selected for the next hold change trigger is selected. Next, the mode of the reserved symbol hy before the change related to the current pending change trigger is determined. To do this, first, a pending change content lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the lottery table for the content of the pending change corresponding to the mode of the reserved symbol hy to be announced after the change selected for the current pending change trigger is read. Then, based on the acquired pending change content lottery random number and the read pending change content lottery table, the mode of the reserved symbol hy before the change related to the current pending change trigger is selected.
Next, in the hold change content selection process, the hold change content selected for each hold change trigger is set in the area corresponding to the hold change trigger in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, according to the arrival of each hold change trigger, the mode of the hold change symbol hy to be announced is changed (promoted) according to the hold change content set for the hold change trigger.

In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, next, "1" is set in the pre-reading notice effect during flag area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300.
With the above, the hold notice production is started.
By a process (not shown), "0" is set in the pre-reading advance notice effect flag area according to the end of the hold advance notice effect.

(Variable command reception processing)
Next, the variable command reception process in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the variable command reception process.
When the variable command reception process is executed in step S32-5, the process proceeds to step S34-1 as shown in FIG. 44.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined control command has been received, and if it is determined that a predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2 and the predetermined control command is executed. If it is determined that the command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control command refers to a symbol type specification command, a variation mode specification command, and a variation pattern specification command.
In step S34-2, the stop effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, the stop effect number (mode of the stop effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, the stop effect number (mode of the stop effect) is determined based on the type of the stop symbol specified by the symbol type designation command. Then, the determined stop effect number is stored in the stop effect number storage area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300.

In step S34-3, the variation effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variation effect determination process, the variation effect number (mode of the variation effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the variation effect determination process, first, the first half variation effect determination process for determining the first half variation effect number (mode of the first half variation effect) is executed.
The control ROM 302 of the effect control board 300 stores a first half variation effect lottery table in which correspondence between the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the first half variation effect number (mode of the first half variation effect) is registered. ..
In the first half variation effect determination process, first, the first half variation effect lottery table is read out. Then, among the first half variation effect numbers registered in the first half variation effect lottery table, the first half variation effect number corresponding to the variation mode number designated by the variation mode designation command is determined (selected).

In the variation effect determination process, next, the second half variation effect determination process for determining the second half variation effect number (mode of the second half variation effect) is executed.
The control ROM 302 of the effect control board 300 stores a second half variation effect lottery table in which correspondence between the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) and the second half variation effect number (mode of the second half variation effect) is registered. ..
In the second half variation effect determination process, first, the second half variation effect lottery table is read. Then, among the latter half variable effect numbers registered in the latter half variable effect lottery table, the latter half variable effect number corresponding to the variable pattern number designated by the variable pattern designation command is determined (selected).

In step S34-4, the advance notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the advance notice effect determination process, the main advance notice effect number (mode of the main advance notice effect) is selected.
The control ROM 302 of the effect control board 300 stores a advance notice effect lottery table in which correspondence between the advance notice effect lottery random number and the main advance notice effect number (mode of the main advance notice effect) is registered.
Further, as a notice effect lottery table, a notice effect lottery table corresponding to each stop symbol number (for each type of stop symbol) is stored.
In order to determine the mode of the main advance notice effect, first, the advance notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the stop symbol number specified by the stop symbol designation command is confirmed, and the advance notice effect lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, the main advance notice effect number is determined (determined) based on the acquired advance notice effect lottery random number and the read advance notice effect lottery table.

In step S34-5, the variation effect setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variable effect setting process, the effect scenario data of the variable effect is set.
Specifically, in the variation effect setting process, the effect scenario data corresponding to the first half variation effect number determined in step S34-3 and the effect scenario data corresponding to the second half variation effect number determined in step S34-3 are provided. read out.
Next, the read effect scenario data is combined to generate the effect scenario data related to the variable effect. Then, the generated effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area.
Further, the effect scenario data corresponding to the main notice effect number determined in step S34-4 is read out. Then, the read effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the main advance notice effect is started at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable effect.

(Stop command reception processing)
Next, the stop command reception process in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the stop command reception process.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, the process proceeds to step S35-1 as shown in FIG. 45.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not the stop designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2 and the stop designation command is received. If it is determined that there is no such process (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, the stop effect start process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect start process, the effect scenario data of the stop effect is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, the stop effect number stored in the stop effect number storage area is acquired, and the effect scenario data corresponding to the acquired stop effect number is read out. Then, the read effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the stop effect (stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) is started.

(Opening command reception processing)
Next, the opening command reception process of step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the opening command reception process.
When the opening command reception process is executed in step S32-7, the process proceeds to step S39-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2 and the opening designation command is received. If it is determined that there is no such process (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8).
In step S39-2, the winning effect setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the winning effect setting process, the effect scenario data of the winning effect is set.
Specifically, in the winning effect setting process, the winning effect number is selected according to the type of the stop symbol designated by the opening designation command. In addition, the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected winning effect number is read out. Then, the read effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. As a result, the winning production is started.

(Vsync interrupt processing)
Next, the Vsync interrupt process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing Vsync interrupt processing.
The synchronization signal generation circuit of the display circuit 320 generates a vertical synchronization signal (Vsync) at predetermined intervals (the vertical synchronization signal is set to a high level).
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts the Vsync interrupt process shown in FIG. 47 at every second predetermined cycle based on the generation of the vertical synchronization signal by the synchronization signal generation circuit. When the Vsync interrupt processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S40-1.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether or not the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1", and it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S40-2, and when it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is not “1” (“0”), the Vsync is concerned. Terminate interrupt processing.

In step S40-2, the frame buffer switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the frame buffer switching process, the frame buffer area specification (drawing area specification / output area specification) is switched.
Specifically, in the frame buffer switching process, the frame buffer area specified in the drawing area of the two frame buffer areas is switched from the drawing area to the output area, and the frame buffer specified in the output area is switched. Switch the area specification from the output area to the drawing area.

In step S40-3, the drawing command buffer switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the drawing command buffer switching process, the drawing command buffer area specification (construction area specification / transfer area specification) is switched.
Specifically, in the drawing command buffer switching process, the drawing command buffer area specified in the construction area of the two drawing command buffer areas is switched from the construction area to the transfer area and is designated as the transfer area. The specification of the drawing command buffer area is switched from the transfer area to the construction area.
In step S40-4, the drawing / output start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the drawing / output start processing, the start of the drawing process by the drawing circuit 322 is specified, and the start of the output process by the display circuit 320 is specified.
Specifically, in the drawing / output start processing, a value that specifies the start of the drawing process is set in the drawing register of the microprocessor 301. As a result, the drawing process by the drawing circuit 322 is started. That is, the drawing circuit 322 can generate drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area by using the compressed image data for one frame stored (preloaded) in the preload area of the DRAM 304. To be started.
Further, in the drawing / output start processing, a value for specifying the start of the output processing is set in the display register of the microcomputer 301. As a result, the output processing by the display circuit 320 is started. That is, the display circuit 320 starts generating and outputting a video signal based on the drawing data for one frame generated in the frame buffer area designated as the output area.

In step S40-5, the drawing command transfer start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-6. In the drawing command transfer start process, the start of the transfer process by the transfer circuit 318 is specified, and the start of the preload process by the preloader circuit 319 is specified.
Specifically, in the drawing command transfer start process, a value is set in the data transfer register of the microcomputer 301 to specify the start of the transfer process for transferring the display list to the preloader circuit 319. As a result, the transfer process by the transfer circuit 318 is started. That is, the transfer circuit 318 starts the transfer of the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area designated in the transfer area to the preloader circuit 319.
Further, in the drawing command transfer start processing, a value for specifying the start of the preload processing is set in the display preloader register of the microcomputer 301. As a result, the preload process by the preloader circuit 319 is started. That is, the preloader circuit 319 transfers the compressed image data for one frame specified in the display list (drawing command) transferred by the transfer circuit 318 (transfer from the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304), and the display list (transfer). Rewriting of the drawing command) and is started.

In step S40-6, the command construction task wake-up process is executed, and the Vsync interrupt process is terminated. In the command construction task wake-up process, the wake-up of the command construction task process is set. As a result, the command construction task processing described later is started.

(Command construction task processing)
Next, the command construction task process that is woken up in step S40-6 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing command construction task processing.
When the command construction task process is woken up in step S40-6, it proceeds to step S46-1 as shown in FIG. 48.
In step S46-1, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the display command buffer area, and if it is determined that unanalyzed command information is stored (Yes), step S46- If it is determined in step 2 that the unanalyzed command information is not stored (No), the process proceeds to step S46-3.
In step S46-2, the command information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S46-1. In the command information analysis process, unanalyzed command information is analyzed and processing is executed according to the result of the analysis.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, when the unanalyzed command information is the command information that specifies the start of the display effect, first, among the animation tables stored in the control ROM 302, the display specified by the command information. Read the animation table corresponding to the production number. Then, in the animation table setting area of the DRAM 304, the read animation table, the frame rate corresponding to the animation table, and the display priority information corresponding to the animation table are set (stored / registered). At this time, the frame rate corresponding to the index number assigned to the animation table is acquired by referring to the frame rate setting table, and the acquired frame rate is set.
On the other hand, when the unanalyzed command information is the command information that specifies the end of the display effect, among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area, the animation table corresponding to the display effect number specified by the command information is selected. Clear (erase).

In step S46-3, the command construction process is executed, and the command construction task process is terminated. In the command construction process, the display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area specified in the construction area.
Specifically, in the command construction process, first, the frame information update process is executed.
In the frame information update process, the frame information is updated for all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, in the frame information update process, for each animation table set in the animation table setting area, the following frame information is replaced with the currently selected frame information as the frame information for which the display list is constructed. Select the frame information of the rank.
In the command construction process, the command construction process is then executed.
In the command construction process, the display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area specified in the construction area.
Specifically, in the command construction process, first, a drawing command is generated for each animation table set in the animation table setting area. For this purpose, among the frame information defined in each animation table, the frame information selected as the target for constructing the display list is acquired. Then, a drawing command is generated based on the acquired frame information.
Here, in the drawing command, the image address of the image data used for drawing, the magnification at the time of drawing the image data (magnification / reduction ratio), the coordinates for drawing the image data (coordinates in the frame buffer area), and the image data. The transparency (transparency / transparency / transparency) at the time of drawing is specified.
In the command construction process, next, the drawing commands generated for all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area are arranged in a predetermined order to construct a display list.
At this time, the order of drawing commands corresponding to the animation table is set based on the display priority information of each animation table set in the animation table setting area.
That is, among the plurality of drawing commands, a plurality of drawing commands are used so that the drawing command having the lower display priority executes the drawing process based on the drawing command first for the drawing command having the higher display priority. Aligned and the display list is constructed. In other words, among the plurality of drawing commands, the drawing command having the lower display priority is arranged so that the drawing process based on the drawing command is executed first, and the display list is constructed. ..

(Sound interrupt processing)
Next, the sound interrupt process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the sound interrupt process.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts the sound interrupt process shown in FIG. 49 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock generation circuit. When the sound interrupt processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether or not the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1", and it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-2, and when it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is not "1"("0"), the sound is concerned. Terminate interrupt processing.

In step S41-2, the command information analysis process is executed, and the sound interrupt process is terminated. In the command information analysis process, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the sound command buffer area, and when it is determined that unanalyzed command information is stored, the unanalyzed command information is responded to. Execute the processing.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, the command list corresponding to the sound effect control number specified by the unanalyzed command information is read from the control ROM 302, and the read command list is set in the control register of the sound circuit 323. As a result, the sound circuit 323 operates according to the command list set in the control register.

(Lamp interrupt processing)
Next, the lamp interrupt process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing lamp interrupt processing.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts the lamp interrupt process shown in FIG. 50 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock generation circuit. When the lamp interrupt processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, the command information analysis process is executed, and the lamp interrupt process is terminated. In the command information analysis process, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area, and when it is determined that unanalyzed command information is stored, the unanalyzed command information is responded to. Execute the processing.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, when the unanalyzed command information is the command information that specifies the start of the lamp effect, the compressed lamp drive data corresponding to the lamp effect number specified by the command information is read and read out. The compressed lamp drive data is set in the lamp register. As a result, the lamp controller 317a controls the lamp effect (driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20 and 21) according to the compressed lamp driving data set in the lamp register.

(Movable body interrupt processing)
Next, the movable body interrupt process executed by the CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the movable body interrupt process.
The CPU 310 of the effect control board 300 starts the movable body interrupt process shown in FIG. 51 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock generation circuit. When the movable body interrupt process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-2. In the register save process, the register value is saved in the save area of the DRAM 304.
In step S43-2, the command information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-3. In the command information analysis process, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area, and when it is determined that unanalyzed command information is stored, the unanalyzed command information is used. Execute the corresponding processing.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, when the unanalyzed command information is the command information that specifies the start of the movable body effect, the compression motor drive data specified by the command information is read out, and the read compression motor drive data is read out. Is set in the motor register. As a result, the motor controller 317b controls the movable body effect (driving of various motors 23 (various movable bodies)) according to the compression motor drive data set in the motor register.
In step S43-3, the register return process is executed, and the movable body interrupt process is terminated. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S43-1 is restored.

(Action of pachinko machine 1)
The pachinko machine 1 controls the audio output by the woofer based on the audio data assigned to the first processing system (audio bus 6) and the data assigned to the second processing system (audio bus 7). The effect control means 300 is provided. Then, the output level (volume) of the voice based on the voice data assigned to the first processing system changes according to the volume value set in the variable volume value setting area 6, and is assigned to the second processing system. The output level of the voice based on the input voice data does not change according to the volume value set in the variable volume value setting area 6.
That is, two processing systems (audio buses 6 and 7) are assigned to one woofer. Then, it is possible to control the output of the voice by the woofer based on the voice data assigned to each processing system. In particular, the audio output level (output intensity / output stage) based on the audio data assigned to the first processing system changes according to the volume value set in the variable volume value setting area 6. On the other hand, the audio output level (output intensity / output stage) based on the data assigned to the second processing system does not change according to the volume value set in the variable volume value setting area 6.
As a result, among the voices output by the woofer, for the voices that allow the output level to change according to the volume value set in the variable volume value setting area 6, the voice data for controlling the voices is used. By assigning to the processing system of 1, the output level can be changed according to the volume value set in the variable volume value setting area 6.
On the other hand, among the voices output by the woofer, for the voices that prohibit the change of the output level according to the volume value set in the variable volume value setting area 6, the voice data for controlling the voices are second. By assigning to the processing system of, it is possible to prevent the output level from being changed according to the volume value set in the variable volume value setting area 6.
As described above, it is variable by defining a processing system for allocating sound data for controlling the sound so that the effect intended by the developer can be achieved for each sound (sound effect) output by the woofer. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect while enabling the change of the output level according to the volume value set in the volume value setting area 6.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the output level of the effect based on the audio data assigned to the second processing system is fixed at a predetermined level (maximum level in the present embodiment).
This makes it possible to more reliably prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect.

(Modification example 1)
Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various modifications can be made in the above embodiment.
For example, the above embodiment shows an example in which the present invention is applied to control of audio output by a woofer.
However, the present invention may be applied to control of lamp light emission, control of motor drive, and the like.
Specifically, it is specific based on the lamp drive data assigned to the first processing system (first channel) and the lamp drive data assigned to the second processing system (first channel). The light emission of the lamp (light emitting means) can be controlled. Then, the output level of the light emission (luminance) of a specific lamp based on the rank drive data assigned to the first processing system can be adjusted by operating the light amount adjustment button, and the lamp assigned to the second processing system. The output level of the light emission (luminance) of a specific lamp based on the drive data cannot be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button.
Further, based on the motor drive data assigned to the first processing system (first channel) and the motor drive data assigned to the second processing system (first channel), a specific motor ( It is possible to control the drive of the actuator, drive means, and drive source. Then, the output level of the specific motor based on the motor drive data assigned to the first processing system can be adjusted by the operation of a predetermined operating means, and the specification based on the motor drive data assigned to the second processing system is possible. It is impossible to adjust the output level of the motor of the above by the operation of a predetermined operation means.

(Modification 2)
Further, in the above embodiment, among the eight volume value setting areas corresponding to the audio bus 7, each volume adjustment operation is performed for the volume value set in the volume value setting area (specific volume value setting area) corresponding to the channel 6. It is impossible to change it according to the operation of the part.
However, it is impossible to change (adjust) the volume value set in the specific volume value setting area according to the operation of the volume adjustment button, and it is possible to change (adjust) according to the operation of the volume changeover switch. It doesn't matter.
With such a configuration, it is possible for the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 to adjust the volume of the ventilation effect (the volume of the woofer) while making it impossible for the player to adjust the volume.

(Modification example 3)
Further, in the above embodiment, the same volume value as the volume value set in each variable volume value setting area may be set in the specific volume value setting area only at the time of debugging.
With such a configuration, the volume value set in the specific volume value setting area can be changed according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit only at the time of debugging. That is, only at the time of debugging, it is possible to change the volume of the audio data assigned to the channel 6 from the audio bus 7 (particularly, the volume of the ventilation effect by the woofer) according to the operation of each volume adjustment operation unit. ..

(Modification example 4)
Further, in the above embodiment, the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is preloaded in the preload area of the DRAM 304, and the sound effect is executed based on the compressed audio data preloaded in the preload area. ..
However, the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 may not be preloaded in the preload area of the DRAM 304, and the sound effect may be executed based on the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303.

1 Pachinko machine 22 Speaker 200 Main control board 300 Production control board 301 Microcomputer 302 Control ROM
303 CGROM
304 DRAM
305 Digital amplifier 310 CPU
323 sound circuit

Claims (2)

A control means capable of controlling the output of the effect by the effect means based on the data assigned to the first processing system and the data assigned to the second processing system is provided.
The output level of the effect based on the data assigned to the first processing system changes according to the set value, and the output level of the effect based on the data assigned to the second processing system becomes the set value. A gaming machine characterized in that it does not change accordingly. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the output level of the effect based on the data assigned to the second processing system is fixed at a predetermined level.

Images